2012 Traverse Owner's Manual

7/23/2019 2012 Traverse Owner's Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2012-traverse-owners-manual 1/449

2012 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1In s tru me n t Pa n e l.. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 -2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle F eatures . .. . . . . . . . . . .1 -17Performance and

M a i n t e n a n c e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 2

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1K e y s a n d L o c k s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

D o o r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 0Vehicle Security .. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 -13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 -16Interior Mirrors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 -19W i n d o w s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 0R o o f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 2

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Airbag System. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 -38

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments. . . . . . . . 4-1

Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4Roof Rack System. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 -5

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5 - 1C o n t r o l s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2Warning Lights, Gauges, and

I n d i c a t o r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 0Information Displays. . . . . . . . . . 5-24Vehicle Messages............5-31Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40

Universal Remote System . . . . 5-48

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Ex te rio r L ig h tin g ... . . . . . . . . . . . .6 -1In te rio r L ig h tin g ... . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 -5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 -6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1I n t r o d u c t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2R a d i o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7 Audio P layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -13Rear Seat Infotainment. . . . . . . 7-36

P h o n e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4 6Trademarks and License

A g r e e m e n t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5 4

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 A i r V e n t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 1M a i n t e n a n c e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 2



2012 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating. . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -21 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22Driv e Sy s te ms ... . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 -2 6B r a k e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 6Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28Cru is e Co n tro l. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 -3 1Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-33

F u e l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3 8Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Conversions and Add-Ons. . . 9-51

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 - 1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 0-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Electrical System. . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Wheels and Tires. . . . . . . . . . . 10-36J u mp Sta rt in g ... . . . . . . . . . . . .1 0 -7 4Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . 11-3Special Application

Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Additional Maintenance

and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9Recommended Fluids,

Lubricants, and Parts. . . . . . 11-12Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle D ata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 1 3 - 1Customer Information. . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects. . . . 13-17Vehicle Data Recording and

P r i v a c y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 - 1 9

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4-2OnStar Additional

I n f o r m a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 - 5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1



Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andTRAVERSE are trademarks and/or

service marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it

appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from your dealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Using this Manual

To quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in the

back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautions

Warning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury or death.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20906535 A First Printing © 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.



iv Introduction

{ WARNING

These mean there is something

that could hurt you or other people.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let

this happen.”

Symbols

The vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead of

text. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions or information.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions or information.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicle

and what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar ®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge



Introduction v

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

t : Traction Control/StabiliTrak

M : Windshield Washer Fluid



vi Introduction

2 NOTES



In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

W i n d o w s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Memory F eatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -8Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated and Ventilated

S e a t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 0Head Restraint

Ad ju s tme n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -1 0Sa fe ty Be lts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -1 0

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Steering Wheel

Ad ju s tme n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -1 2Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Exterior Lighting .. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14Climate Controls .. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15T ra n s mis s io n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -1 6

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Navigation System .. . . . . . . . . . 1-20Driver Information Center

(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 1-20Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-21Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-21Po we r Ou tle ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -2 1Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-22Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit .. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23Driving for Better Fuel

Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Roadside Assistance

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25



1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel



In Brief 1-3

A. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6 ‑ 4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 5 ‑ 5 .

B. Instrument Cluster on page 5 ‑ 11.

C. Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 ‑ 2 .

D. Instrument Panel Storage on page 4‑ 1.

USB Port (Inside IP Storage). Auxiliary Devices on page 7 ‑ 34

E. Infotainment on page 7 ‑ 2 .

Navigation/Radio System(If Equipped). See the separatenavigation manual.

F. Air Vents on page 8 ‑ 11.

G. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6 ‑ 1.

H. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6 ‑ 5 .

I. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5 ‑ 17 .

J. Cruise Control on page 9‑ 31.

K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 5 ‑ 2 .

L. Horn on page 5 ‑ 4.

M. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons (If Equipped). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)(With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 24 or Driver Information

Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 29.

N. Climate Control Systems on page 8 ‑ 1 (If Equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8 ‑ 4(If Equipped).

O. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into

Park on page 9‑ 19.

P. Power Outlets on page 5 ‑ 8 .

Q. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5 ‑ 5 .

Traction Control System (TCS)Disable Button. SeeStabiliTrak ® System on page 9‑ 28 .

Tow/Haul Button (If Equipped).See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑ 25 .

Power Liftgate Button(If Equipped). See Liftgate on

page 2 ‑ 10 .

R. Heated and Ventilated Front Seats on page 3 ‑ 8 (If Equipped).

S. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 ‑ 4.

T. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5 ‑ 16 .



1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformation

This section provides a brief overview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, refer to each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five seconds

to unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

To open or close the liftgate, press

and hold 8 until the liftgate

begins to move.

Press L and release to locate the

vehicle.

Press L and hold for more than

two seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press L again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2 ‑ 3 .

Remote Vehicle Start

Starting the Vehicle

With this feature the engine can be

started from outside of the vehicle.

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.

3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold / untilthe parking lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.



In Brief 1-5

The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:

. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold /until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 ‑ 5 .

Door Locks

To lock or unlock a door manually:

. From the inside use the door

lock knob on the window sill.. From the outside turn the key

toward the front or rear of the

vehicle, or press the K or Qbutton on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Power Door Locks

Base Model

Uplevel Model

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2 ‑ 8 .

Liftgate

To open the liftgate the vehicle mustbe in P (Park). Press the touch padunder the liftgate handle. To close

the liftgate, use the pull cup or pullstrap as an aid.



1-6 In Brief

Power Liftgate

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the vehicle must be in P (Park) to

operate it.. Press and hold 8 on the

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

. Press O.

. Press the touch pad switch onthe outside liftgate handle.

For more information see Liftgate on page 2 ‑ 10 .

Windows

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see Power Windows on page 2 ‑ 20 .

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

A. Seat Adjustment Handle

B. Driver Seat Height AdjustmentLever

C. Seatback Lever



In Brief 1-7

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle (A) under the seatto unlock it.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition, and then release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Move the lever (B) up or down toraise or lower the seat.

Use the lever (C) to adjust theseatback.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3 ‑ 3 and Reclining Seatbacks on page 3 ‑ 5 for more information.

Power Seats

A. Seat Adjustment Control

B. Seatback Control

C. Lumbar Control

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding thecontrol (A) forward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the control (A) upor down.

. Adjust the seatback by tilting thetop of the control (B) forward or rearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks on

page 3 ‑ 5 .

. Increase or decrease lumbar support by pressing the front or rear of the control (C).

See Lumbar Adjustment on page 3 ‑ 4.

See Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 ‑ 4 for more information.



1-8 In Brief

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driver door are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seatand outside mirrors.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback

recliner, and both outsidemirrors.

See Power Mirrors on page 2 ‑ 16 for more information.

Not all vehicles will have theability to save and recall themirror positions.

2. Press and hold “1” until

two beeps sound.3. Repeat for a second driver

position using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1”

or “2.” The vehicle must be inP (Park). A single beep will sound.The seat and outside mirrors will

move to the position previouslystored for the identified driver.

See Memory Seats on page 3 ‑ 7 andVehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 40 for moreinformation.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature can move the seat

rearward to allow extra room to exitthe vehicle.

S : Press to recall the easy exitseat position. The vehicle must bein P (Park).

See Memory Seats on page 3 ‑ 7 andVehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 40 for moreinformation.



In Brief 1-9

Second Row Seats

The second row seat can be foldedto access the third row. Pull thesliding seat lever forward; the seatcushion folds, and the seat slidesforward.

See Rear Seats on page 3 ‑ 9.

Third Row Seats

The third row seatbacks can befolded forward, and the seats can

be removed.To fold the third row seatback:

1. Remove anything on or under the seat.

2. Disconnect the rear safety belt

mini-latch using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, and let thebelt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in the holder in the headliner.

3. Pull up on the release lever on

the back of the seat.4. Push the seatback forward to

lay flat.

See Third Row Seats on page 3 ‑ 11for more information.



1-10 In Brief

Heated and VentilatedSeats

Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons

Shown, Heated Seat Buttons

Similar

If available, the buttons are on thecenter console. To operate, theengine must be running.

I: If available, press to heat theseatback only.

H : If available, press to cool theentire seat.

J : Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then to

the off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting andone for the lowest.

See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats on page 3 ‑ 8 for moreinformation.

Head RestraintAdjustment

Do not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the proper

position.For more information see Head Restraints on page 3 ‑ 2 and Seat Adjustment on page 3 ‑ 3 .

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections for important information on how to usesafety belts properly:

. Safety Belts on page 3 ‑ 14.

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly on page 3 ‑ 15 .

. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3 ‑ 16 .

. Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 ‑ 47 .



In Brief 1-11

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags,and roof ‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle is

started. See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 ‑ 31 for moreinformation.

Mirror AdjustmentExterior Mirrors

Base Model

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press o or p to select a mirror.

2. Press the control pad to adjustthe mirror.

3. Return the switch to the center to deselect the mirror.

Uplevel Model


1. Press (A) or (B) to select amirror.


3. Press (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.



1-12 In Brief

Folding Mirrors

For vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Pull the mirror out to returnto its original position.

For vehicles with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2 ‑ 17 .

Interior Mirror

The automatic dimming rearviewmirror reduces the glare from other vehicle headlamps. Each time thevehicle is started, the dimmingfeature comes on.

See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2 ‑ 19.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.



In Brief 1-13

Interior Lighting

Dome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in the

overhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps come on when adoor is opened, unless the domelamp override button is pressed in.

To manually turn them on, turn theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise to the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E DOME OFF: Press the top of the button in and the dome lampsremain off when a door is opened.

An indicator light on the buttoncomes on to show that the domelamps are off. Press near the bottomof the button so the dome lamps

come on when a door is opened.Reading Lamps

Press the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

For more information, see:

. Dome Lamps on page 6 ‑ 5 .

. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6 ‑

5 .



1-14 In Brief

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel, to the left

of the steering wheel.O : Turns the automatic lightcontrol on or off.

AUTO: Automatic operation of theheadlamps at normal brightness andother exterior lamps.

; : Manual operation of theparking lamps and other exterior lamps.

5 : Manual operation of theheadlamps and other exterior lamps.

For more information, see:

. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 ‑ 1.

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ Automatic Headlamp System on page 6 ‑ 3 .

. Delayed Headlamps on page 6 ‑ 3 .

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the left side of the

steering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbol

to control the windshield wipers.8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn theband up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.



In Brief 1-15

Windshield Washer

J : Press the button at the endof the turn signal/lane changelever to spray washer fluid on the

windshield.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper and rear wash buttonis located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

Z : Press to turn the rear wiper onand off. The wiper speed cannot bechanged.

Y : Press to spray washer fluid onthe rear window. The window wiper will also come on.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 5 ‑ 5 and Rear Window Wiper/ Washer on page 5 ‑ 5 .

Climate Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

F. Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger



1-16 In Brief

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Auto Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Recirculation


F. Air Delivery Mode ControlG. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power (On/Off)

J. Rear Window Defogger K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

M. Passenger Side TemperatureControl

See Climate Control Systems on page 8 ‑ 1 or Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8 ‑ 4 (If

Equipped). For more informationabout the rear climate control, seeRear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) on page 8 ‑ 9

or Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)on page 8 ‑ 10 .

TransmissionElectronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronic

shift position indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicating thecurrent gear that has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gear range available.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑ 24.



In Brief 1-17

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

© or ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Change the display betweenthe radio station frequency and thetime, if equipped. While the ignition

is off, press 4 to display the time.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7 ‑ 3 .

For vehicles with a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System andRear Seat Audio (RSA) System ,see Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)

System on page 7 ‑ 36 and Rear

Seat Audio (RSA) System on page 7 ‑ 45 for more information.

Storing a Favorite Station

A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by using

the radio FAV button. Press FAVto go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page.



1-18 In Brief

Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7 ‑ 7 .

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theradio with CD, DVD, and USB Port:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then

press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press H to display HR, MIN,

MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels to bechanged.

4. To increase or decrease the time

or date, turn f clockwise or

counterclockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicle's specificaudio system, see Clock on page 5 ‑ 8 .

Satellite Radio

Vehicles with an XM™ satelliteradio tuner and a valid XM satelliteradio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMsatellite radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and in

digital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.

For more information refer to:

. www.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).

. www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see Satellite

Radio on page 7 ‑ 8 .

Portable Audio Devices

This vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput located on the radio faceplateand a USB port located in theinstument panel storage area.External devices such as iPods™,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, USB storage devices,etc. can be connected to theauxiliary port using a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) input jack or the USB portdepending on the audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7 ‑ 34.

Bluetooth ®

The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audiosystem, microphone, and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone

must be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7 ‑ 46 .



In Brief 1-19

Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w and c / x : Press to selectpreset or favorite radio stations,select tracks on a CD/DVD,

or select tracks and navigate folderson an iPod® or USB device.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar ® systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. See

Bluetooth on page 7 ‑

46 and OnStar Overview on page 14‑ 1 for moreinformation.

c / x : Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio, CD, and for equippedvehicles, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the navigationmanual for more information.

¨ : Press to go to the next radiostation while in AM, FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with or without anavigation system:

Press ¨ to go to the next track or

chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folder

when navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

+e

and− e

: Press to increase or to decrease the volume.

See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 ‑ 2 for more information.

Cruise Control

T : Press to turn cruise controlon and off. The indicator comes onwhen cruise control is on.



1-20 In Brief

+ RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET –

: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or to makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑ 31.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation system manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most major

freeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turn

instructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of pointsof interest (POIs), such as banks,

airports, restaurants, and more.See the navigation system manualfor more information.

Driver Information Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons)

To access the DIC, some vehicleshave buttons located on the

instrument panel.

V : Press to set or reset certainfunctions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC.

U : Press to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 40 for more

information.T : Press to display the oil life,park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readingson vehicles with this feature, andcompass calibration and zonesetting on vehicles with this feature.

3 : Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip odometers, fuel

range, average economy, timer, fuelused, and average speed.

Some vehicles do not have thebuttons shown, however some of the menus can be viewed by usingthe trip odometer reset stem.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)(With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 24 or

Driver Information Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 29.



In Brief 1-21

Ultrasonic Parking Assist

If available, Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).URPA uses audible beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure proper operation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑ 33 for more information.

Storage Compartments

For vehicles with a second rowcenter console, press thebuttons (B) or (C) to accessstorage areas.

Lift up on (A) for additionalstorage area.

See Floor Console Storage on page 4‑ 3 .

Power Outlets

The vehicle has 12‐volt accessorypower outlets which can be used toplug in electrical equipment, such asa cell phone or MP3 player.

The power outlets are located:

. On the instrument panel belowthe climate controls.

. Inside the center floor console.

. At the rear of the center floor console.

. In the rear cargo area.To use the outlets, remove thecover.

See Power Outlets on page 5 ‑ 8 .



1-22 In Brief

Sunroof

The ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY to operate thesunroof and power sunshade. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑ 19.

The switch to operate the frontsunroof is on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror.

Vent: Press the front or rear of theswitch to vent or close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, pressand release the rear or front of the switch to express-open or express-close the sunroof.

For more information see Sunroof on page 2 ‑ 22 .

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak ®

SystemThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin, andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems turn on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.

. To turn off traction control, press

and release t located on the

instrument panel, and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride Control System Messages on page 5 ‑ 36 .

. Press and release t again

to turn on the traction controlsystem. The StabiliTrak system

remains on.For more inf ormation, seeStabiliTrak ® System on page 9‑ 28 .

Tire Pressure Monitor

This vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure of one of the vehicle's tires. If the

warning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 . The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tire

pressure warning light may appear when the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an early



In Brief 1-23

indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normal

monthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver ’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10 ‑ 43 .

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

This vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment or a tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 10 ‑ 57 for completeoperating information.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 ‑ 55 .

Engine Oil Life System

The engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. If the vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC)buttons: Press the vehicleinformation button until OILLIFE REMAINING displays.

If the vehicle does not haveDriver Information Center (DIC)buttons: The vehicle must be inP (Park) to access this display.

Press the trip odometer resetstem until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays.

3. If the vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC)buttons: Press and hold theset/reset button until “100%” is

displayed. Three chimes soundand the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message goes off.

If the vehicle does not haveDriver Information Center (DIC)buttons: Press and hold thetrip odometer reset stemuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGshows “100%.” Three chimessound and the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messagegoes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System on page 10 ‑ 10 .

1 24 I B i f



1-24 In Brief

Driving for Better FuelEconomy

Driving habits can affect fuel

mileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weather conditions are appropriate,use cruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properly

inflated.. Combine several trips into a

single trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgram

U.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or

Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9 for moreinformation.

I B i f 1 25



In Brief 1-25

Roadside Assistance and OnStar (U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStar

subscription, press theQ button

and the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center (U.S. andCanada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includes

online service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online owner manual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.chevyownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar ®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisor

for Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview on page 14‑ 1 for more information.

1 26 I B i f



1-26 In Brief

2 NOTES

Keys Doors and Windows 2 1



Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .. . . . . . . . . . 2-3Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -8 Automatic Door Locks ......... 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -9

DoorsL i f t g a t e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 0

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Folding Mirrors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Heated Mirrors ............... 2-18Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Park Tilt Mirrors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-19 Automatic Dimming Rearview

Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power Windows .. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Roof Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

2 2 Keys Doors and Windows



2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.

The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition and

all door locks.The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to be

damaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If locked out of the vehicle, callRoadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside Assistance Program (Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9.

With an active OnStar subscription,

an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview on page 14‑ 1.

Keys Doors and Windows 2-3




Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System

See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 ‑ 20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far from

the vehicle.. Check the location. Other

vehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.

. If the transmitter is still not

working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2 ‑ 3 .

With Remote Start and Power

Liftgate Shown, Without Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this feature, seeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2 ‑ 5 for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the

parking lamps flash once toindicate locking has occurred.If enabled through the DIC, the

horn sounds when Q is pressed

again within five seconds.

2-4 Keys Doors and Windows




See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 40 for additional information.

Pressing Q may arm the content

theft‐deterrent system. See Anti-theft Alarm System on page 2 ‑ 13 .

K (Unlock): Press once to unlock

only the driver door. If K is pressed

again within five seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, theparking lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5 ‑ 40 .

Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

disarms the content theft‐deterrent

system. See Anti-theft AlarmSystem on page 2 ‑ 13 .

8 (Power Liftgate): Press andhold until the liftgate begins to moveto open or close the liftgate. Thetaillamps flash and a chime sounds

to indicate when the liftgate isopening or closing.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The parkinglamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and hold L for more than

two seconds to activate the panic

alarm. The parking lamps flash andthe horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to

ON/RUN or L is pressed again.

The ignition must be in LOCK/OFFfor the panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters to

the VehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a

replacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersprogrammed to it. See your dealer to program transmitters to thisvehicle.

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

Keys Doors and Windows 2-5



Keys, Doors, and Windows 2 5

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flat

head screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool into

the notch located alongthe parting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter back

together.

Remote Vehicle Start

This vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts theengine from outside of the vehicle.

/ (Remote Start): This button islocated on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirementson remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle could run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitter functions have an increased rangeof operation. However, the rangemay be less while the vehicle isrunning.

There are other conditions thatcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2 ‑ 3 for additional information.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q on the

RKE transmitter.

3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold / until

the parking lamps flash. If thevehicle's lights cannot be seen,

press and hold/ for at least

four seconds.




2 6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system will operateautomatically if the vehicle has theautomatic system, or at the samesetting as when the vehicle was lastturned off.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats turn onduring colder outside temperaturesand shut off when the key is turned

to ON/RUN. See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats on page 3 ‑ 8 for more information.

The rear window defogger andheated mirrors, if the vehicle hasthem, turn on during colder outsidetemperatures and turn off when thekey is turned to ON/RUN.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drive thevehicle.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

Extending Engine Run Time

To extend the engine run timeby 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1through 3 while the engine is stillrunning. The engine run time canonly be extended if it is the firstremote start since the vehicle hasbeen driven. Remote start can beextended one time.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10-minutetime frame has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10-minute time

frame will start.

For example, if Q and then/ are

pressed again after the vehiclehas been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing

the engine to run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts or remote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using the remotestart button, the ignition must beturned on and then back off before

the remote start procedure can beused again.




eys, oo s, a d do s

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To manually shut off a remote start:

. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press / until the

parking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

Conditions in Which the

Remote Start Will Not WorkThe vehicle cannot be started usingthe remote start feature if the key isin the ignition, the hood is open, or if there is an emission control systemmalfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperaturegets too high or if the oil pressure

gets low.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in

a crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wear safety belts properly andthe doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may be

unable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock the

vehicle whenever leaving it.. Outsiders can easily enter

through an unlocked door when you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door manually:

. From the inside use the door lock knob on the window sill.

. From the outside turn the keytoward the front or rear of thevehicle, or press the or button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.




y , ,

Power Door Locks

Base Model

Uplevel Model

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center (DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”

under Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 40 .

Automatic Door Locks

Vehicles with an automatic lock/ unlock feature enable you toprogram the vehicle's power door locks. This feature can beprogrammed through the Driver Information Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5

‑ 40 for more

information.




y

Lockout Protection

This feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a front

door is open.

If the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driver door is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power door lock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety Locks

The vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from the

inside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge of each door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.




Doors

Liftgate

Manual Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting that

brings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information about

carbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑ 21.

To unlock the liftgate, use thepower door lock switch or press thedoor unlock button on the RKEtransmitter twice. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2 ‑ 3 .

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad under the liftgate handle. Thevehicle must be in P (Park) to openthe liftgate. To close the liftgate, usethe pull cup or pull strap as an aid.

The liftgate will not open if thebattery is disconnected or has lowvoltage. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedand has adequate voltage, and theliftgate still will not function, the

vehicle should be taken to a dealer for service.

Power Liftgate Operation

The vehicle may have a power liftgate. The vehicle must be inP (Park) to use this feature.

The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound when the power liftgate

is used.




{ WARNING

You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power

liftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.

Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in thefollowing ways:

. Press and hold the power liftgatebutton on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 ‑ 3 for more information.

. Press O.

. Press the touch pad on theoutside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons or touch pad asecond time while the liftgate ismoving reverses the direction.

Power Liftgate Button near

Liftgate Latch

The liftgate can also be closed bypressing the power liftgate buttonnext to the liftgate latch. Press thebutton a second time during liftgateoperation to reverse that operation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.




If the transmission is shifted out of P (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate power function will continue to completion.If the transmission is shifted out of

P (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo could fallout of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed andlatched before you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lost

pressure, the lights will flash and achime will sound. The liftgate willstay open temporarily, then slowlyclose. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate if thisoccurs.

Obstacle Detection Features

A warning chime will sound and the

liftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition if the liftgate encounters anobstacle during a power open or

close cycle. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.

If the liftgate comes across more

obstacles on the same power cycle,the power function deactivates, andyou must manually open or closethe liftgate. A message displays,LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate thatthe liftgate is open. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 24 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 29 for more

information. After removing theobstructions, manually open theliftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully closedand latched position. The liftgateresumes normal power operation.

The vehicle has pinch sensorslocated on the side edges of theliftgate. If an object is caught

between the liftgate and the bodyand presses against this sensor, theliftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again or

closed manually. Do not force theliftgate open or closed during apower cycle.

Manual Operation of Power

Liftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press the switch on thecenter console to the OFF position. A message displays, POWER

LIFTGATE OFF, to indicate that theliftgate is manual operation mode.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 24 or




Driver Information Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 29for more information.

With the power liftgate disabled and

all of the doors unlocked, the liftgatecan be manually opened andclosed.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle on the outside of the liftgate and lift the gate open. Toclose the liftgate, use the pull cup tolower the liftgate and close. Theliftgate latch will power close.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.

If the RKE button or the power closebutton on the liftgate is pressedwhile power operation is disabled,the lights will flash three times, butthe liftgate will not move.

It is not recommended that youdrive with the liftgate open.

However, if you must drive with theliftgate open, the liftgate should beset to manual operation by pressingthe OFF switch on the center console.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm System

On vehicles with an anti-theft alarmsystem, to activate the system:

. Press Q on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter or thepower door lock switch whenany door is open.

The security light flashes.

When the door is closed, the

security light stops flashing andstays on solid for approximately30 seconds. The content

theft-deterrent alarm is notarmed until the security lightgoes off.

If the delayed locking feature is

active, the alarm is not activateduntil all doors are closed and thesecurity light goes off.

. Press Q when the driver door

is closed. The security lightcomes on solid for approximately30 seconds and then goes off.The content theft-deterrent alarmis not armed until the security

light goes off.The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe vehicle's key or the manualdoor lock.

If a locked door is opened withoutusing the RKE transmitter, a10-second pre-alarm occurs. Thehorn chirps and the lights flash.




If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to START or the

door is not unlocked by pressing Qduring the 10-second pre-alarm, thealarm goes off. The headlamps flashand the horn sounds for about30 seconds, then turns off to savethe battery power.

The vehicle can be started with thecorrect ignition key if the alarm hasbeen set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle with the door key after the doors are closed.

. Unlock the door with the RKEtransmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way sets off the alarm if the system has been armed.

PressK or place the key in the

ignition and turn it to START to turn

off the alarm.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver side window, and open

the driver door.

2. Press Q.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor, and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Reach in through the window,unlock the door with the manualdoor lock, and open the door.

This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the headlamps flash,check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replacethe fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 10 ‑ 30 .

If the alarm does not sound or theheadlamps do not flash, see your dealer for service.

Immobilizer

See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 ‑ 20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer Operation

This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passive

theft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turnedto ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.




You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.

The security light comes on if there is a problem with arming or

disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses an incorrect key, the vehicledoes not start. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start andthe security light on the instrumentpanel comes on when trying to startthe vehicle, there may be a problemwith the theft-deterrent system. Turnthe ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key and check

the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 10 ‑ 30 for additional information. If the enginestill does not start with the other key,

the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key III+ to have anew key made. In an emergency,

contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmed

to the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all currentlyprogrammed keys are lost or do notoperate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have keys madeand programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who

can service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key has

a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUN

position within five seconds of the original key being turned tothe LOCK/OFF position.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to beprogrammed.




If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or damaged, see your dealer or alocksmith to have a new key made.

The SERVICE THEFT

DETERRENT SYSTEM messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when there is aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Anti-theft AlarmSystem Messages on page 5 ‑ 37 for additional information.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before

changing lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Base ModelTo adjust the mirrors:

1. Press o or p to select a mirror.


3. Return the switch to the center to deselect the mirror.




Uplevel Model


1. Press (A) or (B) to select amirror.


3. Press (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

Folding Mirrors

For vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Pull the mirror out to return

to its original position.For vehicles with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

To reset the mirrors, fold and unfoldthe mirrors one time using thepower folding mirror controls.

A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting. This sound isnormal during the reset operation.




Heated Mirrors

For vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger ” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8 ‑ 4 for moreinformation.

Blind Spot Mirrors

The blind spot mirror is a smallconvex mirror built into the upper

and outer corner of both outsidemirrors. It can show objects thatmay be in the vehicle's blind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blind

zone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirror has an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic or before changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind your




vehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over your shoulder to double checkbefore moving slowly into the

adjacent lane.

Park Tilt Mirrors

If the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors havea park tilt feature. This feature tiltsthe outside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driver

to view the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or driver mirror returns to its original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5 ‑ 40 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror

Adjust the inside rearview mirror

for a clear view of the area behindyour vehicle. To avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind, move thelever to the right for nighttime useand to the center for daytime use.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more information about

OnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview on page 14‑ 1.

Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror

The vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming reduces the

glare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have aRear Vision Camera (RVC). See

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑ 34 for more information.

If the vehicle has a RVC,

the O button for turning the

dimming feature on or off willnot be available.

Vehicles with OnStar havethree additional control buttonsfor the OnStar system. See OnStar Overview on page 14

‑ 1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.




Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially with

the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economy

performance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rear window is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the power windows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.




Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

The power window controls are

located on each of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger andrear windows. The power windowswork with the ignition in ACC/ ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑ 19.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edgeof the switch to raise the window.

Express-Up/Express-DownWindows

A window with the express‐up/downfeature allows it to be raised or

lowered without holding the switch.Press or pull the window switchfully and release it to activate theexpress feature. The express modecan be canceled by pressing or pulling the switch.

Programming the Power Windows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignitionin the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/ RUN position, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is

active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑ 19.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly after the window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Anti-Pinch Feature

The anti-pinch feature is onwindows with the express-upfeature. If an object is in the way of the window as it is express-closing,or in certain weather conditions likesevere icing, the window will stopand open to a factory presetposition. The window functionsnormally once the obstruction isremoved.




Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The windowlockout switch is located with thepower window switches on the

driver door armrest. This featureprevents the rear windows frombeing operated, except from thedriver position. Press the switch toturn the lockout feature on or off. Anindicator light will come on to showthe lockout feature is on.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Roof

Sunroof

The ignition must be in ON/RUN or

ACC/ACCESSORY to operate thesunroof and power sunshade. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑ 19.

The vehicle may have a sunroof over the front seats and a rear sunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.




The switch to operate the frontsunroof is on the headliner above

the rearview mirror.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the front of theswitch to vent the sunroof. Pressand hold the rear of the switch toclose the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, press andrelease the rear of the switch toexpress-open the sunroof. Pressand release the front of the switch to

express-close the sunroof.

Manual Sunshade

The front sunshade must beopened and closed manually. Toopen the sunshade, press thebutton on the sunshade handle torelease it and guide it back. Toclose the sunshade, pull the

sunshade forward until it latches.

Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time while thevehicle is not in use. Dirt and debrismay collect on the sunroof seal or in the track. This could cause an

issue with sunroof operation, noise,or plugging the water drainagesystem. Periodically open thesunroof and remove any obstaclesor loose debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using aclean cloth, mild soap, and water.Do not remove grease from thesunroof.




2 NOTES

Seats and Restraints 3-1



Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints ............... 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated and Ventilated Front

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear SeatsR e a r S e a t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9Third Row Seats ............. 3-11

Safety BeltsSa fe ty Be lts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -1 4How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-22Safety Belt Care ............. 3-22Replacing Safety Belt System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Airbag System Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -23Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-25When Should an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28How Does an Airbag

Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28What Will You See after an

Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Passenger Sensing

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-36 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37Replacing Airbag System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Infants and Young

Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43

Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-45Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash .. . . . . . . . 3-54

Securing Child Restraints(Re a r Se a t) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -5 4

Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat) .. . . . . . . . . . 3-56

3-2 Seats and Restraints



Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints for

all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the same

height as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

1. Pull the head restraint up toraise it. To lower the head

restraint, press the releasebutton, located on the headrestraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push thehead restraint down.

2. Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released tomake sure that it is locked inplace.




The vehicle's second‐row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The vehicle's third‐row seats haveheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The vehicle's head restraints andheadrests are not designed to beremoved.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.


B. Driver Seat Height Adjustment

Lever

C. Seatback Lever

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle (A) under the seatto unlock it.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition, and then release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.




Move the lever (B) up or down toraise or lower the seat.

Use the lever (C) to adjust theseatback. See Reclining Seatbackson page 3 ‑ 5 .

Power Seat Adjustment

A. Seat Adjustment Control

B. Seatback Control

C. Lumbar Control

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding thecontrol (A) forward or rearward.

.

Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (A) upor down.

. Adjust the seatback by tilting thetop of the control (B) forward or rearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3 ‑ 5 .

. Increase or decrease lumbar support by pressing the front or rear of the control (C).

See Lumbar Adjustment on page 3 ‑ 4.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If available, move the handleforward or rearward to increase or decrease lumbar support.




Power Lumbar

If available, press and hold the frontor rear of control to increase or decrease lumbar support. Releasethe control when the seatbackreaches the desired level of lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you could

go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have the

seatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.


M l R li i S tb k 2 P h d ll th tb k t



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of the

vehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they are

locked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.


M S t N t ll hi l ill h th Thi f t i t d ff i



Memory Seats

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driver door are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seatand outside mirrors.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback

recliner, and both outsidemirrors.

See Power Mirrors on page 2 ‑ 16 for more information.

Not all vehicles will have theability to save and recall themirror positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driver position using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1”or “2.” The vehicle must be inP (Park). A single beep will sound.The seat and outside mirrors willmove to the position previouslystored for the identified driver.

Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat and outside mirrors tostored positions when entering thevehicle.

To activate, unlock the driver door with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. The driver seat and outside mirrors will moveto the memory position associatedwith the transmitter used to unlockthe vehicle.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Memory Seat Recall” under Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 40 for more

information.To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, memorybuttons, or the power mirror buttons.

If something has blocked the driver seat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manual

control for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer for service.


Easy Exit Driver Seat position again If the exit position is



Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature can move the seatrearward to allow extra room to exitthe vehicle.

S (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Pressto recall the easy exit seat position.

The vehicle must be in P (Park).

If the easy exit seat feature isprogrammed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, automaticseat movement occurs when theignition key is removed.

A single beep sounds. The driver

seat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in). To move the seat backfarther, press the easy exit seatbutton again until the seat is all theway back.

If something has blocked the driver seat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold the

power seat control rearward for two seconds. Try recalling the exit

position again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer for service.

See “Easy Exit Seat” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)

on page 5 ‑ 40 for more information.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,

cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater to

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

overheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons

Shown, Heated Seat Buttons

Similar

If available, the buttons are on thecenter console. To operate, theengine must be running.

I (Heated Seatback): If available,

press to heat the seatback only.H (Cooled Seat): If available,press to cool the entire seat.


J (H t d S t d S tb k) Remote Start Heated Seats Rear Seats



J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

The passenger heated seat maytake longer to heat up.

The heated and/or cooled seats

are canceled after the ignition isturned off.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on automaticallyduring a remote vehicle start. Theheated seats will be canceled when

the ignition is turned on. Press thedesired heated seat button to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat button lights willnot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature of an unoccupiedseat may be reduced.

See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 ‑ 5 for more information.

Rear Seats


B. Reclining Seatback Strap

C. Sliding Seat Lever


Entering and Exiting the 5 Pull the sliding seat lever (C)



Entering and Exiting theThird Row

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To access the third row:

1. Remove objects on the floor in

front of or on the second rowseat, or in the seat tracks on thefloor.

2. Move the front center consolearmrest completely forward. SeeCenter Console Storage on page 4‑ 2 .

3. Place the folding armrests in theupright position.

4. Make sure that the safety belt isunfastened and in the stowedposition.

5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)forward and move the seatbackforward. The seat cushion willfold, and the entire seat will slideforward. The head restraints will

fold out of the way automatically.Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the second row seat to itsnormal seating position:

1. Remove objects on the floor behind the second row seat or inthe seat tracks on the floor.

2. Pull the seatback rearward untilit is locked in place.

3. Slide the seat rearward bypushing on the seatback until itis locked into place.

4. Return the head restraint to theupright position by reachingbehind the seat and pulling the

head restraint forward until itlocks into place.


Push and pull on the head Folding the Seatback Adjusting the Seats



Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked.

5. Push down on the rear of theseat cushion until it is locked in

place.

6. Push and pull on the seatbackand seat cushion to make surethey are locked in place.

7. Check that the safety belt is notunder the seat cushion.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull

the reclining seatback strap (B).

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the strap to lock theseatback in place.


Folding the Seatback

To fold the second row seatbacks:


2. Place the armrest in the uprightposition, and unfasten thesafety belt.

3. Pull forward on the recliningseatback strap (B) and pushdown on the seatback.

The head restraint will fold downautomatically.

To return the seatback to theseating position, lift the upper corner of the seatback and push itrearward until it locks into place.Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked. Pull up onthe head restraint to return it to theupright, locked position.

Adjusting the Seats

To adjust the second row seats, pulloutward on the seat adjustmenthandle (A). Slide the seat forward or rearward to the desired position.

Release the handle, and push andpull on the seat to make sure it islocked.

Third Row Seats

{ WARNING

Using the third row seating

position while the second row isfolded, or pushed forward in theentry position, could cause injuryin a sudden stop or crash. Besure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sureit is locked into place.


Folding the Seatback belt retract into the headliner. Returning the Seat to the



Folding the Seatback

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle the

safety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the third row seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, and let the

belt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in the holder in the headliner.

3. Pull up on the release lever onthe back of the seat.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the seatback to theseating position:

1. From the rear of the vehicle,raise the seatback to the uprightposition using the pullstrap onthe back of the third row seat,or lift the seatback and push itinto place from inside thevehicle.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.


{ WARNINGRemoving the Third Row Seats 5. Remove the seat by tilting it



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.

4. Pull on the safety belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

e o g t e d o Seats

To remove a third row seat:

1. Remove the cargo managementsystem, if available and

installed. See CargoManagement System on page 4‑ 4.


Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle the

safety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

3. Fold the seatback down. See“Folding the Seatback” earlier inthis section.

4. Remove the rear bolts on thefloor on each side of the seat.

y gslightly upward, and then pullingit out of the rear of the vehicle inone motion.

6. Replace the bolts in the floor

holes for storage.

Installing the Third Row Seats

To reinstall a third row seat:

1. Before installing the seat theseatback must be foldedforward. See “Folding theSeatback” earlier in this section.

The seats must be placed inthe proper locations to attachcorrectly. The wider seat mustbe installed on the driver sideand the narrower seat on thepassenger side. Remove thebolts from the holes in the floor before installing the seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehiclefloor so that the front seat hooksare on the vehicle bars.


3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to Safety Belts WARNING (C ti d)



q55Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on theseat to make sure it is locked inplace.

4. Raise the seatback to the

upright position. Push and pullon the seatback to make sure itis locked into place.

5. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes some

things not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outside

of a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders on page 5 ‑ 14 for additional information.


Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in



y y

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop because

you stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether youare wearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, is

much greater if you are belted.Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why

should I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants still

have to buckle up to get themost protection.

all Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety Belts

ProperlyThis section is only for people of adult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child willbe riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 3 ‑ 38 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3

‑ 41.

Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.


There are important things to knowb i f b l l

would apply force on your bd Thi ld

Lap-Shoulder Belt



about wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the beltlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,

this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt

abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.

These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearing

your safety belt properly.. Never allow the lap or

shoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap or shoulder belt over anarmrest.

p

All seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seating

position with a detachable safetybelt and the safety belt is notattached, see “Returning the Seat tothe Seating Position” under Third Row Seats on page 3 ‑ 11 for instruction on reconnecting thesafety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder belt

properly.1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is

adjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.


later in this section for i t ti d



2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let it

get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out all

the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 3 ‑ 22 .

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ”

instructions on use andimportant safety information.

6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.


Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way If a



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should

return to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

safety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder but not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to but notcontacting the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 3 ‑ 15 .

To move it down, push down on therelease button (A) and move the

height adjuster to the desiredposition. You can move the heightadjuster up by pushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.


Safety Belt Pretensioners Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:



This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they

are part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

pretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3 ‑ 23 .

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children who

have outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

guide to the safety belt:

Outboard Positions1. For the outboard positions,

remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

For the third row center position, locate the comfortguide which is located in astorage pocket, at the top of the seat, under the headrest on

the driver's side of the vehicle.


To access the comfort guide,you will first need to move the



you will first need to move theheadrest forward by pulling onthe handle behind the seatback.The comfort guide will now beaccessible.

Third Row Center Position

Pull the comfort guide out of itsstorage location and then returnthe headrest to its uprightposition.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of the

belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. The

elastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulder

belt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)To remove and store the comfortguide squeeze the belt edges



( )

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of the

belt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

guide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage location or on its storage clip.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.


Safety Belt Extender Safety System Check Safety Belt Care



If the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long

enough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To

wear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Now and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are all working

properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 5 ‑ 14 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3 ‑ 22 .

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a

After a minor crash, replacement of safety belts may not be necessary.

Airbag System



System Parts after aCrash

{WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle. A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are working

properly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

safety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in a

crash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 ‑ 15 .

The vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver.

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

and for the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.


All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on an

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system: { WARNING



attached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the word

AIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is onthe side of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the word

AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

g y

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 3

‑ 27 .

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety belt

properly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blinkof an eye, anyone who is up

against, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safety

belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.


{ WARNINGWhere Are the Airbags?



Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriously

injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraint

system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 3 ‑ 38 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3 ‑ 41.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 ‑ 15 for

more information. The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.




The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger

Side Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger

Side Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.


{ WARNINGWhen Should an AirbagInflate?

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending on

h th th hi l hit bj t



If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properly

or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any other

airbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or window

opening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

Inflate?

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's or front outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in time

for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

whether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow

or wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.

Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.


The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAi b S t 3 23

impact airbag is intended to inflateon the side of the vehicle that is

t k B th f il i b ill

What Makes an AirbagInflate?



Airbag System on page 3 ‑ 23 .Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe side

crashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are intended toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can vary

with specific vehicle design.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted side

struck. Both roof-rail airbags willinflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, or the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle is

about to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thevehicle damage or the repair costs.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and how

quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

Inflate?

In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3 ‑ 25 .

How Does an AirbagRestrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.


Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the

What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?

{ WARNING



distributing the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second and third rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? on page 3 ‑ 27 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

a bag ates

After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time after they inflate. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? on page 3 ‑ 25 .

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent

people from leaving the vehicle.

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problems

for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door.

If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off the

fuel system after the airbags inflate.


You can lock the doors, and turnoff the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using the

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a



warning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may be

concealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in another crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly

other parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

records information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy on page 13 ‑ 19 and Event Data

Recorders on page 13 ‑ 19.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer for service.




We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in a

WARNING (Continued)The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:



an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a booster

seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the

(Continued)

passenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag willnot inflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

outboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passenger seat is unoccupied.

. The system determines that aninfant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passenger takes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5 ‑ 16 .


The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag

person’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraints

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint



outboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboard

passenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, depending upon the

who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced right

away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5 ‑ 15 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions

provided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (Rear Seat) on page 3 ‑ 54 or Securing Child Restraints (Right Front Passenger Seat) on page 3 ‑ 56 .


5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

following steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontal



e c e, e o d ca o s s ,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,

if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints

on page 3 ‑ 2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use the

o ou boa d passe ge o aairbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortably

extended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position for two to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.


Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

S f t b lt h l k th

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passenger sensing system. Here is how:

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install a



Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers and

braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,

or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers can affect how wellthe passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on

page 3 ‑ 36 for more information

about modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

g y

. The passenger sensing systemmay turn off the passenger

airbag when liquid is soakedinto the seat. If this happens, theoff indicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passenger sensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

g ,child restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 ‑ 15 for

important safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passenger sensing system.


Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after the

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle



Airbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in several

places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information on page 13 ‑ 16 .

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbag

can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheet

metal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing or moving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnish

trim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.


In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system thatincludes sensors as part of the front

If the vehicle has roof ‐rail airbags,see Different Size Tires and Wheelson page 10 ‑ 51 for additional

Airbag System Check

The airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance or



outboard passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seat

trim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarketseat heater or a comfort enhancingpad or device, installed under or ontop of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of the

passenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 ‑ 31.

information.

If your vehicle needs to be modifiedbecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whether the modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any other reason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 4 or

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 5 .

regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See

Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 ‑ 15 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken,the airbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/or

airbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 3 ‑ 25 . See your dealer for service.


Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

Child Restraints

Older Children



{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properly

after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 ‑ 15 for more information.

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.


The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatb t U b t t ith

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat

This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over the

bd hi h ld



booster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3 ‑ 16 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of the

trip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.

abdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3 ‑ 16 .

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.


In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle Older

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lap



thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed together

and seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too far

forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


Infants and YoungChildren

Everyone in a vehicle needs

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young childrenand infants Neither the vehicle's

WARNING (Continued)

For example in a crash at only



Everyone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither the

distance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNINGChildren can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with thesafety belts.

and infants. Neither the vehicle ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Every

time infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a

110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.


{ WARNING

Never do this.

Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which



Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when

it inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front

seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

are purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. When

purchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.


The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are still

Child Restraint Systems



height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraints

available for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is not

fully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants should

always be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low

on the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a

crash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

(A) Rear ‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child's

body with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of the

vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt or LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH System) on page 3 ‑ 47 for

more information. Children can be


endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add on child

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctly

Where to Put theRestraint

According to accident statistics,



When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint which

may be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injure

people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

a d de o s a e o o co ec yuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child

restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in a

booster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing

WARNING (Continued)

guarantee that an airbag will notd l d l

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always make



gchild is so great if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint would

be very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right

front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can

(Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is

turned off.Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a

rear seat.See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3 ‑ 31 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

ysure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to or

interferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to

properly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the

Lower Anchors



The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use the

vehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

child restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the top

tether and anchor.In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how to

attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tether anchors and attachments.

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will

accommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to secure

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations



A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether

attachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or ina crash.

the top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with top

tethers are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your child

restraint.

Second Row — Bucket

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.




Second Row — 60/40 Bench


j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Third Row


To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each second row anchor

position has a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is located on the cover,if equipped, or near the anchor.

The top tether anchors are locatedat the bottom rear of the seatbackfor each seating position in thesecond row.




Second Row — Bucket Shown,

Bench Similar

Some vehicles have top tether

anchors with a cover. Open thecover to access the anchors.

Second Row — Bucket Shown,

Bench Similar

Some vehicles have exposed top

tether anchors.

Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Third Row

The third row has one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of

the center seatback. This anchor should be used for the center seating position only. Never installtwo top tethers using the same toptether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tether must be attached.


According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seating

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after the



system secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put the

Restraint on page 3 ‑ 45 for additional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint is

not attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that

came with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint so

children cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seat

with a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lower

attachments or the desiredseating position does not have


lower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions

1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:



instructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Recline the seatback to thefull reclined position.

Make sure the second rowbench seatbacks arealigned at the same anglebefore placing the childrestraint on the seat. Makesure the third row benchseatbacks are both uprightbefore placing the childrestraint on the seat.

restraint to the lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. If the anchor is covered, flipopen the cover to exposethe anchor.

following instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.




If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest or head restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest or head restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement, for proper installation.


Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position study the

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If th hild t i t d t h



{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and any

necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may be

necessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the

child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 ‑ 47 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using a

safety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 ‑ 47 for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will be

using the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put

the Restraint on page 3 ‑ 45 .

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.





Position the release button on

the buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock is

set, the shoulder belt can betightened but not pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt to

tighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure the

retractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.


6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors and

Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat)

The vehicle has airbags A rear

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously



Tethers for Children (LATCH

System) on page 3 ‑

47 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a

forward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint on page 3 ‑ 45 .

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 ‑ 31 and

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5 ‑ 16 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

injured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the

i b i ff If

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through



airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3 ‑ 31 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 ‑ 47 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3 ‑ 47 for top tether anchor locations.

child restraint say that the top strap

must be anchored.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay

lit when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5 ‑ 16 .

the vehicle s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The child

restraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button on

the buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled if necessary.


7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt to



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock is

set, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt to

tighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked repeatSteps 5 and 6.

move it side to side and back

and forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installed

and the on indicator is lit, see“If

the On Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger Sensing System on page 3 ‑ 31 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage 4-1

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

Glove Box

Lift the glove box handle to open it.Use the key to lock and unlock theglove box.



Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Armrest Storage .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -4Cargo Management

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System ............ 4-5

g

This vehicle has an instrumentpanel storage area. To open thecover, press the button (A).

This vehicle has an auxiliary input jack. See Auxiliary Devices on page 7 ‑ 34 for more information.

Cupholders

There are two cupholders, withremovable liners, located in front of the center console. There may becupholders located in the secondrow seat armrest. To access, pullthe armrest down. There areadditional cupholders located oneach side of the third row seatand in each door. There may becupholders located at the rear of thecenter console. To access, pull thehandle down.

4-2 Storage

Armrest Storage Center Console Storage



Vehicles with a rear seat armrest

have two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down to access thecupholders.

Pull up on the lever, located on the

front of the center console armrest,to slide it forward and backward. Toopen the armrest storage area,press the button located on the frontof the armrest.

There is additional storage under the armrest. Move the armrest allthe way to the rear position then

slide the storage cover back toaccess.

Storage 4-3

Floor Console Storage{ WARNING

Never open more than one of thethree latches at a time to helpavoid personal injury and damage



For vehicles with a second row

center console, open each area toaccess the storage compartmentinside.

To access the upper storage area,press the upper button (B) and liftup. To access the lower storage

area, press the lower button (C) andlift up. The top of the console canbe folded forward for increasedstorage area. Lift up on the handleon the rear of the console (A) andpull forward.

avoid personal injury and damageto the console.

Notice: Slide the front consoleas far forward as it will go beforefolding the second row consoleforward to help prevent damageto the consoles.

4-4 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Cover

Cargo ManagementSystem

This vehicle has a cargomanagement system located inthe rear

{ WARNING

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover leftin the open position could be



For vehicles with a cargo cover, it

can be used to cover items in therear of the vehicle. To install thecover, place the loops on eachcorner of the cover on the four hooks in the rear of the vehicle. Thecover should be stored securelywhen not in use.

Cargo Tie-Downs

Four cargo tie‐downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads.

the rear.

To remove the cargo managementcover:

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Pull the cover up making sure to

unhook the hinges at the rear of the cover.

in the open position, could bethrown about the vehicle during

a crash or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured. Besure to return the cover to theclosed position and latch beforedriving. If the cover is removed,always store it outside of thevehicle. When it is replaced,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

3. Remove the cover from thevehicle and store outside of thevehicle.

Convenience Net

For vehicles with a convenience netin the rear, use it to store small

loads as far forward as possible.The net should not be used to storeheavy loads.

Storage 4-5

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top of

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory See your dealer for

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the vehicle’s center of gravity higher Avoid high speeds



g pthe vehicle that is longer or wider

than the roof rack — like paneling,plywood, or a mattress — thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the

vehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

accessory. See your dealer for additional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss of control. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle.

For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑ 10 .

4-6 Storage

2 NOTES



Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

Controls

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17Malfunction

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Battery Voltage and Charging

M e s s a g e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3 2Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32Cruise Control Messages 5-32



Controls

Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5Rear Window Wiper/

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Po we r Ou tle ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -8

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, and

I n d i c a t o r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 0Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Sp e e d o me te r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -1 2O d o m e t e r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 2Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -17

Brake System WarningL i g h t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 0

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-21StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-21Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23High-Beam On Light .. . . . . . . . 5-23Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Information DisplaysDriver Information Center

(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-24Driver Information Center

(DIC) (Without DIC

Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-32Door Ajar Messages .. . . . . . . . 5-32Engine Cooling System

M e s s a g e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3 3Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-35Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -36Object Detection System

M e s s a g e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3 6

Ride Control SystemM e s s a g e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3 6 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-37 Anti-theft Alarm System

M e s s a g e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3 7Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-37Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39Vehicle Reminder

M e s s a g e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4 0

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-40Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-40

5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization (With

DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-48

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls



Universal Remote System

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -48Universal Remote System

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w and c / x (Next/Previous):Press to select preset or favoriteradio stations, select tracks on a

CD/DVD, or select tracks andnavigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.


To select preset or favorite radiostations:

. Press and release w and

c / x to go to the next or previous radio station stored as

To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice for vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold w and c / xwhile listening to a song listed in

2. Press and release w and

c / x to go back to theprevious folder list.


c / x to scroll up or down



a preset or favorite.

To select tracks on a CD/DVD(if equipped):

Press and release w and c / xto go to the next or previous track.

To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice for vehicles without anavigation system:

1. Press and hold w and c / xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folder display on the radio display.


c / x to scroll up or downthe list, then press and hold ,or press to play the highlightedtrack.

the main audio page, to quickly

move forward or in reversethrough the tracks. See theseparate navigation manual for more information.

Track information is displayed

on the screen. Release w and

c / x when the desired trackis reached.

2. Press and release w andc / x to begin playing thetrack shown in the display.

To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device for vehicles without anavigation system:

1. Press and hold w and c / xwhile listening to a song until the

contents of the current folder display on the radio display.

/ x o sc o up o dothe list

. To select a folder, press

and hold w, or press ¨ when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press and

hold c / x.

To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device for vehicles with anavigation system:

1. Go to the Music Navigator byfirst touching the center touchscreen folder button in the mainaudio page.

2. While in Music Navigator, selectthe folder/artist/genre/category,

etc. using the touch screen.


3. Press and release c / x to

scroll through the selected musiclist. Touch the track label on thetouch screen to highlight andbegin playing the track fromthat list

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio, CD, and for equipped vehicles, DVD, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigation

For vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is

heard to place the radio intoSCAN mode. A station will playf fi d b f i



that list.

4. Press and holdc / x toquickly scroll through theselected music list.

b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar ® systems, press and hold

for longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth on page 7 ‑ 46 and OnStar Overview on page 14‑ 1 for moreinformation.

c / x (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

For vehicles with the navigation

system, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the navigationmanual for more information.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to thenext radio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with or without a

navigation system:

Press ¨ to go to the next track or

chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folder

when navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

for five seconds before moving

to the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,

press ¨ again.

3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB,press and hold to quickly moveforward through the tracks.Release to stop on the desiredtrack.

+ e and − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.

Horn

Press a on the steering wheel

pad to sound the horn.


Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbol

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement on page 10 ‑ 25 .

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washer fl id f i th



p yto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Use for a single wiping

cycle.

9 (Off): Use to turn the wipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Delays wiping cycle. Turn the bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Windshield Washer

J (Washer Fluid): Press thebutton at the end of the turn signal/ lane change lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipersclear the windshield and either stop

or return to the preset speed. Theignition key must be in ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for thisto work. See Washer Fluid on page 10 ‑ 20 .

fluid can form ice on the

windshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID is displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when thewasher fluid is low. See Washer Fluid Messages on page 5 ‑ 40 .

Rear Window Wiper/ Washer

The rear wiper and rear wash buttonis located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn therear wiper on and off. The wiper speed cannot be changed.

Y (Wash): Press to spray washer fluid on the rear window. Thewindow wiper will also come on.


Release the button when enoughfluid has been sprayed on thewindow. The rear wiper will run afew more cycles after it is released.If the rear wiper function wasalready on prior to pressing the

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the

Press the vehicle information

button until PRESS V TO

CHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.



wash button, it stays on until the

wiper button is pressed again.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid that is in the windshieldwasher reservoir. See Washer Fluid on page 10 ‑ 20 .

Compass

Your vehicle may have a compass

in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 24 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5 ‑ 29 for more informationabout the DIC.

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight upon

leaving the factory. Your dealer willset the correct zone for your location.

zone through the DIC if the zone is

not set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select the

appropriate variance zone.


4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, for example, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interference

b d b ti CB

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle information




calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.

It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

may be caused by a magnetic CB

or cell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone in whichthe vehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.


CALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete the

calibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETEfor a few seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.


Clock

To adjust the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then

press O to turn the radio on.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press © SEEK.

. Presss REV.

T f t l k i

Power Outlets

The vehicle has 12‐volt outlets thatcan be used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phone or MP3 player.



p

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels tobe changed.

4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press the pushbutton belowthe selected label.

. Press ¨ SEEK.

. Press \ FWD.

. Turn f clockwise.

. Turn f counterclockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press G and then the

pushbutton located under theforward arrow that displays onthe radio screen until the time

12H (hour) and 24H (hour), andthe date MM/DD (month andday) and DD/MM (day andmonth) display.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the desired option.

3. Press G again to apply the

selected default, or let the

screen time out.

The power outlets are located onthe instrument panel below theclimate controls, inside the center floor console, at the rear of thecenter console, and in the rear cargo area. Lift the cover to accessthe outlet and replace when notin use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.


Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that

Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternative Current

The vehicle may have a power outlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected



do not plug in equipment that

exceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain accessory plugs may not becompatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see your dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑ 51.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

maximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

detected.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See Retained

Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑ 19. The power restarts whenequipment using 150 watts or less isplugged into the outlet and a systemfault is not detected.


The power outlet is not designed for and may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage such as:compressor-driven refrigerators

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrong

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lights



and electric power tools.. Other equipment requiring an

extremely stable power supplysuch as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

See High Voltage Devices and Wiring on page 10 ‑ 28 .

signal that something is wrong

before it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is started

to indicate they are working.

comes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.


Instrument Cluster



English Uplevel Shown, Metric Similar


Speedometer

The speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel is leftin the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.



Odometer The odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver door to show the old mileagereading.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

English

Metric

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, butthe vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel,the FUEL LEVEL LOW message willappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). For more informationsee Fuel System Messages on

page 5 ‑ 35 .


Here are some situations that mayoccur with the fuel gauge. None of these indicate a problem with thefuel gauge.

. At the gas station, the gas pumpshuts off before the gauge

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge



reads full.. It takes a little more or less fuel

to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge might have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

.

The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. If the gaugepointer moves into the red area, itmeans that the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has beenoperated under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 10 ‑ 17 for more information.


Voltmeter Gauge This is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonecan occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is left

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrument



When the engine is not running,but the ignition is on, this gaugedisplays the battery voltage inDC volts.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The vehicle'scharging system regulates voltagebased on the state of charge of thebattery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.

in the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, a SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMmessage will appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and/or thecharging system light comes on.See Battery Voltage and Charging Messages on page 5 ‑ 32 for moreinformation.

However, readings in either warningzone may indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

panel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,

neither the light nor the chimecomes on.


Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, remove The airbag readiness light comes on



When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

This cycle continues several timesif the front passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

g

the object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness Light

This light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor(s),passenger sensing system, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,

the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3 ‑ 23 .

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means

the airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.


Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator

The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 ‑ 31 for important safety information. The

for on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle, you may not see the systemcheck. Then, after several moreseconds, the status indicator willlight either ON or OFF, or either the

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.



p y

instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, the

passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol

on or off symbol to let you knowthe status of the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness

Light on page 5 ‑ 15 for more

information, including importantsafety information.


Charging System Light See Vehicle Messages on page 5 ‑ 31 for more information.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn off all accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

If the malfunction indicator lamp



The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes on

while driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the Driver Information Center (DIC) alsodisplays the SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM message.

MalfunctionIndicator Lamp

A computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This light

comes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Ignition Positions on page 9‑ 15 for more information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assists

the service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead to

costly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacementof the original tires with other than those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) can

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosis

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission system malfunction:



affect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/ Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications on page 10 ‑ 3 .

system on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard accelerations.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible.

emission system malfunction:

. Check that the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tank on page 9‑ 41. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap

properly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,

hesitation on acceleration,


or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments mayhave programs to inspect theon-vehicle emission controlequipment. For the inspection, the

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The malfunction indicator lamp ison with the engine running, or if the light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.



p p g

See Recommended Fuel on page 9‑ 39.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealer hasthe proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems

that might have developed.

emission system test equipment isconnected to the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

g

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or run

down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer

can prepare the vehicle for inspection.


Brake System WarningLight

The vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop the

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has a

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake system



vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

English Metric

If the vehicle has antilock brakes,this light should come on when thekey is turned to START. If it doesnot come on, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is a

problem.

brake problem.If, while driving, the light comes onand a brake message comes on theDriver Information Center (DIC), pulloff the road and stop carefully. Thepedal could be harder to push or thepedal can go closer to the floor.It could take longer to stop. If thelight is still on, have the vehicle

towed for service. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 5 ‑ 21 and Towing theVehicle on page 10 ‑ 79.

warning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed for service.

The brake message remains on untilany DIC button is pressed. The

brake light remains until the problemis fixed. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5 ‑ 32 for moreinformation.


Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is noton, there are still brakes, but noantilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on,there are no antilock brakes andthere is a problem with the regular

StabiliTrak ® Indicator Light



The ABS warning light comes onbriefly when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN. This is normal.If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there is a problem.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while driving, the

brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 ‑ 20 .

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes on when the Tow/ Haul mode has been activated.

For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑ 25 .

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light goes off.

If it stays on, or comes on while

driving, there could be a problemwith the StabiliTrak system and thevehicle might need service. Whenthis warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin.

This light flashes when theStabiliTrak system is active.

See StabiliTrak ® System on page 9‑ 28 for more information.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.



The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on briefly whenthe vehicle is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If the

system is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, the vehicle may havea problem with the cooling system.Stop and turn off the vehicle toavoid damage to the engine. A warning chime sounds when thislight is on.

See Engine Overheating on page 10 ‑ 17 for more information.

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more of

the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Vehicle Messages on page 5 ‑ 31 for more information.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and Loading

Information label. See Tire Pressureon page 10 ‑ 42 for more information.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10 ‑ 44 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oil

pressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.


Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

Security Light For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-theft Alarm System on page 2 ‑ 13 .

High-Beam On Light



The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have the

vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash rapidly if the alarmsystem is arming and one or moreof the monitored entry points is notclosed. The light will stay on if the

alarm is arming and all entry pointsare closed.

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6 ‑ 2 for moreinformation.


Cruise Control Light Information Displays

Driver Information Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons)

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, theinformation below explains the

ti f thi t

The outside air temperature andcompass, if equipped, also displayon the DIC when viewing the tripand fuel information. The outside air temperature automatically appearsin the top right corner of the DICdisplay. If there is a problem with

th t th t t l th



This light comes on whenever thecruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑ 31 for moreinformation.

operation of this system.

The DIC displays information aboutyour vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located at the top of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift lever position indicator on the bottom lineof the display. See Automatic Transmission on page 9‑ 22 for more

information.

the system that controls thetemperature display, the numberswill be replaced with dashes. If thisoccurs, have the vehicle serviced.The compass will be shown in thebottom right corner of the DICdisplay. See Compass on page 5 ‑ 6 for more information.

The DIC also allows some features

to be customized. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5 ‑ 40 for more information.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, youcan also use the trip odometer resetstem to view the odometer and tripodometers.


DIC Buttons

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located in thecenter of the instrument panel.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readingson vehicles with this feature, andcompass calibration and zonesetting on vehicles with this feature.

3 (T i /F l) P thi b tt

will alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”

d E i Oil M



The buttons are the set/reset,customization, vehicle information,and trip/fuel buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in the

following pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5

‑ 40 for more

information.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, andaverage speed.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Press

this button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

OIL LIFE

Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If you see 99% OIL LIFE

REMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life system

under Engine Oil Messages on page 5 ‑ 34. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10 ‑ 8 . In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule on

page 11‑

3 for more information.Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display yourself after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.

To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 10 ‑ 10 .


PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,press the vehicle information buttonuntil PARK ASSIST displays. Thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in this

display press the set/reset button to

UNITS

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between metricor English units of measurement.Once in this display, press the set/ reset button to select between

METRIC or ENGLISH units All

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd air to a specific tire will appear in the display. See Tire Pressure on page 10 ‑ 42 and Tire Messages on page 5 ‑ 38 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows



display, press the set/reset button toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPAsystem automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the

DIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5 ‑ 36 and Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑ 33 for more information.

METRIC or ENGLISH units. Allof the vehicle information willthen be displayed in the unit of measurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewed

in the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa)or pounds per square inch (psi).Press the vehicle information buttonuntil the DIC displays FRONTTIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES kPa(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see your dealer for service.

COMPASS ZONE SETTING

This display will be available if thevehicle has a compass. See

Compass on page 5 ‑

6 for moreinformation.

COMPASS RECALIBRATION

This display will be available if thevehicle has a compass. SeeCompass on page 5 ‑ 6 for moreinformation.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.


Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

ODOMETER

Press the trip/fuel button until

ODOMETER displays This display

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing the set/ reset button or the trip odometer reset stem while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled retroactive reset. This can

be used to set the trip odometer to

begins moving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km(5.2 mi), etc.

If the retroactive reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number of

kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven



ODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi). Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the odometer.

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”

earlier in this section.

TRIP A and TRIP B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIPA or TRIP B displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi) since the last resetfor each trip odometer. Both tripodometers can be used at the same

time. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the tripodometers.

be used to set the trip odometer tothe number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retroactive reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The trip

odometer will display the number of kilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 mi) before it is startedagain, and then the retroactive reset

feature is activated, the display willshow 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle

kilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivenduring the last ignition cycle.

RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button untilRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate number of remaining kilometers (km) or miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven

without refueling. The display willshow LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic and

making frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, the


number may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuel

range cannot be reset

For example, if the vehicle isaccelerating and achieving low fuelefficiency this display will showfewer bars, but if the vehicle iscruising on a flat freeway andgetting high fuel efficiency, thedisplay will show more bars. Fuel

economy cannot be reset

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

FUEL USED



range cannot be reset.AVG (Average) ECONOMY

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recorded

since the last time this menuitem was reset. To reset AVGECONOMY, press and hold theset/reset button.

Fuel Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELECONOMY displays. The FUELECONOMY display shows an

estimate of the vehicle fueleconomy under a given drivingcondition at a specific moment.

economy cannot be reset.TIMER

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This displaycan be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/ reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will show the

amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even if another display is being shown onthe DIC. The timer will record upto 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

FUEL USEDPress the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of liters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.

AVG (Average) SPEED

Press the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEED displays. This displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Thisaverage is calculated based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. To

reset the value to zero, press andhold the set/reset button.


Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Driver Information Center (DIC) (Without DICButtons)

If your vehicle does not have DIC

for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,units, and display language.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, youcan use the trip odometer resetstem to view the following displays:odometer and trip odometers.

T i Od t R t St

each trip odometer. Both tripodometers can be used at thesame time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing andholding the trip odometer reset stemwhile the desired trip odometer is

displayed



If your vehicle does not have DICbuttons, the information belowexplains the operation of thissystem.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe trip odometer reset stemlocated on the instrument panelcluster. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off,or acknowledge, DIC messages.

The DIC displays trip and vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

If your vehicle does not have DICbuttons, you can use the trip

odometer reset stem to view thefollowing displays: odometer, tripodometers, oil life, park assist menu

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items

ODOMETER

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil ODOMETER displays. Thisdisplay shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi).

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”

later in this section.

TRIPA or TRIP B

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRIP A or TRIP B displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either kilometers (km) or

miles (mi) since the last reset for

displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retroactive reset. This canbe used to set the trip odometer tothe number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retroactive reset feature,press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display thenumber of kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven since the ignitionwas last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehiclebegins moving, the trip odometer

will accumulate mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven


8 km (5 mi) before it is started again,and then the retroactive resetfeature is activated, the display willshow 8 km (5 mi). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km(5.2 mi), etc.

If the retroactive reset feature is

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”

under Engine Oil Messages on page 5 ‑ 34. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See Engine

Oil on page 10‑

8 In addition to theengine oil life s stem monitoring the

PARK ASSIST

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If your vehiclehas the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, press the tripodometer reset stem until PARK ASSIST displays. This display

allows the system to be turned on or



If the retroactive reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number of kilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivenduring the last ignition cycle.

OIL LIFE

To access this display, the vehicle

must be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a schedule

consistent with your drivingconditions.

Oil on page 10 8 . In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule on page 11‑ 3 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display yourself after each oil

change. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 10 ‑ 10 .

allows the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display, press andhold the trip odometer reset stem toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPAsystem automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When the

URPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), theDIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5 ‑ 36 and Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑ 33 for more information.


UNITS

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you toselect between metric or Englishunits of measurement. Once in this

display press and hold the trip

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). This displayallows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages willappear. To select a language:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.

Multiple messages may appear oneafter another



display, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem to selectbetween METRIC or ENGLISHunits. All of the vehicle informationwill then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected.

stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGEdisplays.

2. Continue to press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to scrollthrough all of the availablelanguages.

The available languages areENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS

(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),and NO CHANGE.

3. Once the desired language isdisplayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to set your choice.

Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canpress any of the DIC buttons onthe instrument panel or the tripodometer reset stem on theinstrument panel cluster toacknowledge that you received themessages and to clear them fromthe display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember that clearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem.


The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in

the instrument panel cluster.

on the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX



BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver systemstarts reducing certain features of the vehicle that you may be able tonotice. At the point that the featuresare disabled, this message is

displayed. It means that the vehicleis trying to save the charge in thebattery.

Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

the instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light on page 5 ‑ 17 . Driving with this problemcould drain the battery. Turn off allunnecessary accessories. Have theelectrical system checked as soonas possible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 ‑ 20 . If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the message

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays whenever the cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 9‑ 31 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is shiftedout of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.


HOOD OPEN

On some models, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the hoodfor obstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the message

still appears on the DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door

again. Check to see if the message

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.



pp

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door

again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the liftgate is open whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate.Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.

g gstill appears on the DIC.

POWER LIFTGATE OFF

This message displays when thepower liftgate has been turned off by pressing the power liftgate buttonon the center console.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

the normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5 ‑ 13 . To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can

continue to drive your vehicle.If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.


ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panel

cluster and/or DIC, stop the

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panel

cluster and/or DIC, stop the

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE

OIL SOON message. See EngineOil Lif S t 10 10 f



, pvehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating on page 10 ‑ 17 for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle to

idle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge on page 5 ‑ 13 .

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10 ‑ 19 for information on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

, pvehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating on page 10 ‑ 17 for more information.

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reaches

unsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

g gOil Life System on page 10 ‑ 10 for information on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil on page 10 ‑ 8 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑ 3 for moreinformation.


OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressureis low, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the

instrument panel cluster and/or C

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the engine

coolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10 17

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See Fuel Gauge on page 5 ‑ 12 and Fuel on

page 9‑38 for more information.



pDIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oilpressure is corrected. See EngineOil on page 10 ‑ 8 for moreinformation.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop the

vehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10 ‑ 8 .

pEngine Overheating on page 10 ‑ 17 for further information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction in

performance, proceed to your destination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible.

p g

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 ‑ 17 . Reinstall the

fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank on page 9‑ 41. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.


Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to

be replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” under

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the off position.

Object Detection System

and clear it from the DIC display.For more information see Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑ 33 .

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic Rear

Parking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help you



Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2 ‑ 3 .

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.This message clears itself after 10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.

This message clears itself after 10 seconds.

j yMessages

PARK ASST (Assist)BLOCKED SEE OWNERSMANUAL

This message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9

‑ 33 for

more information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer reset

stem to acknowledge this message

not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑ 33 for more information.See your dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there isa problem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to


drive, however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when there

is a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When this

on page 9‑ 28 for more information.This message clears itself after 10 seconds.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the contenttheft-deterrent system has detecteda break-in attempt while you wereaway from your vehicle. See Anti-theft Alarm System on page 2 ‑ 13 for more information.

Service Vehicle Messages



Control System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealer for service. See StabiliTrak ® Systemon page 9‑ 28 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when the

Traction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak ®

System on page 9‑ 28 for moreinformation. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when the

Traction Control System (TCS) isturned on. See StabiliTrak ® System

problem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 ‑ 15 and Airbag System on page 3 ‑ 23 for more information.

Anti-theft Alarm System

MessagesSERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See Immobilizer Operation on page 2 ‑ 14 for moreinformation.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.

Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when aproblem is detected with the power steering system. When thismessage is displayed, you maynotice that the effort required tosteer the vehicle increases or feels


heavier, but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer immediately.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunction

occurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

This message also displays LEFTFRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (rightfront), LEFT RR (left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See Tire

Pressure Light on page 5 ‑ 22 .

If ti

(With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 29 or Driver Information Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 29.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire Pressure

Monitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on the



y y p

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays when your vehicle's throttle system is notfunctioning properly. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.

Tire Messages

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding air until the tire pressure is equal tothe values shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10 ‑ 36 , Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑ 10 , and Tire Pressure on

page 10 ‑ 42 .

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem. The DIC alsoshows the tire pressure values. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)

g p y pTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5 ‑ 22 . Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10 ‑ 44 for

more information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when theTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is re-learning the tire

positions on your vehicle. The tirepositions must be re-learned after


rotating the tires or after replacing atire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on page 10 ‑ 48 , Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 10 ‑ 43 , and TirePressure on page 10 ‑ 42 for moreinformation.

Transmission MessagesALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

warning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again after 30 seconds. If the message stayson, see your dealer right away. See All-Wheel Drive on page 9‑ 26 for more information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

If your vehicle has the All-Wheel

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel cluster

and/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission This could lead to



gALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a compactspare tire on the vehicle, when the Antilock Brake System (ABS)warning light comes on, or when therear differential fluid is overheating.

This message turns off when thedifferential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled untilthe compact spare tire is replacedby a full-size tire. If the warningmessage is still on after putting onthe full-size tire, you need to resetthe warning message. To reset the

Drive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthis system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle after 30 seconds and checkfor the message on the DIC display.If the message is still displayed or

appears again when you begindriving, the AWD system needsservice. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

transmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty. Do notdrive the vehicle with overheatedtransmission fluid or while thetransmission temperaturewarning is displayed.

This message displays and a chime

sounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.


Vehicle Reminder Messages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is cold

enough to create icy roadconditions Adjust your driving

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer fluid reservoir

as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on

VehiclePersonalization

Vehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons)

Your vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allow

t t i f t t



conditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH(KM/H)

This message displays when your

vehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h(80 mph) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering system.Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.

Compartment Overview on page 10 ‑ 6 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Washer Fluid on page 10 ‑ 20 for more information.

you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.


The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the Feature

Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if a

language other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you to

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.



1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customizationbutton to enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).

ychange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button until

the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN

ENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DIC

messages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear.

pp g

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The current

setting will remain.To select a setting, press the set/ reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

You can also change the languageby pressing the trip odometer resetstem. See “DISPLAY LANGUAGE”

under Driver Information Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) earlier

in this section for more information.


AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the doors will automaticallylock. See Automatic Door Locks on page 2 ‑ 8 for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the

DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See Automatic

Door Locks on page 2 ‑ 8 for more

information.

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

NO CHANGE: No change will be

made to this feature. The currentsetting will remain



button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/

reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver door will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

setting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/ reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receive

when locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 ‑ 3 for more information.


Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button on


REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter You will not receive

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.


To select a setting, press the set/ reset button while the desired



the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.


transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2 ‑ 3 for moreinformation.


REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press the set/ reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKE

transmitter.


DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doors

and liftgate with the power door lockswitch and a door or the liftgate isopen, this feature will delay lockingthe doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily override

delayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or the


lock button on the RKE transmitter twice. See Delayed Locking on page 2 ‑ 8 for more information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollth h th f ll i tti

is dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for this

feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollth h th f ll i tti

APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears on



through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectthe amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when it

through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.



setting is displayed on the DIC.

APPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehicle

with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.


See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2 ‑ 3 for more information.





There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.



Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thehi l i hift d i t R (R )



g p y

CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/reset

button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.

g p y

PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to select whether or not the outside mirror(s) willautomatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2 ‑

19for more information.

vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver'soutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger's outside mirror will be

tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's andpassenger's outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).




EASY EXIT SEAT

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seat

feature. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑ 7 for more information.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat andsteering column will stay in theoriginal exit position, unless amemory recall took place prior to

Press the customization button untilMEMORY SEAT RECALL appearson the DIC display. Press the set/ reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.



page 3 7 for more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SEAT appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seatexit recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat will move backwhen the key is removed from theignition.

memory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.



setting is displayed on the DIC.MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seats on page 3 ‑ 7 for more information.

ON: The driver seat and outsidemirrors will automatically move tothe stored driving position when theunlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed.

NO CHANGE: No change will be

made to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.


REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote start

off or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine from


outside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2 ‑ 5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on the

DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature Then press the

FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/reset

button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the


FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V

TO EXIT appears in the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again will

return you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.



for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.

. The trip/fuel or vehicleinformation DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.


Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 ‑ 20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)

rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely

before attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved it may be

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in your



Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, security systems, andhome automation devices.

of the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehicles

as well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in thissection.

battery be installed in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.


To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outside

in view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of your garagedoor opener receiver (motor head unit).

3. At the same time, press andhold both the Universal Home

Remote button to be used tocontrol the garage door and thehand-held transmitter button Do

the frequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.

. If the indicator light stays

on continuously, theprogramming is complete

d th d h ld



and hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when theUniversal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds. This step willerase the factory settings or allpreviously programmed buttons.

Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 inches) away from the

Universal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light

hand held transmitter button. Donot release the Universal HomeRemote button or the hand-heldtransmitter button until Step 4has been completed.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may require

substitution of Step 3 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote willflash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receives

and the garage door shouldmove when the UniversalHome Remote button ispressed and released.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 6 through 8.

. If the Universal HomeRemote indicator lightblinks rapidly for two seconds and then turnsto a constant light, continuewith the programmingSteps 6 through 8.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist with

the remaining steps.


6. After Steps 1 through 5 have

it. If the garage door does notmove, press and hold thesame button a second time for two seconds, and then releaseit. Again, if the door does notmove, press and hold the samebutton a third time for two seconds, and then release.

The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate the

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured to

time out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are



p gbeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage door opener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may vary bymanufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. After you press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 8.

8. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdthe Universal Home Remotebutton, selected in Step 3 to

control the garage door, for two seconds, and then release

should now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem.” Do not repeat Step 1,

as this will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go to

www.homelink.com.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures,regardless of where you live,replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the

following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Home Remote. The

Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then


rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete the trainingprocedure.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using Universal Remote

Press and hold the appropriate

Erasing Universal RemoteButtons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote device:

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote Button

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote buttons, repeatthe programming instructions earlier in this section, beginning withStep 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,

ll th t i t h



Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator lightwill come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 4 or Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 5 .


2 NOTES



Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

F la s h -to -Pa s s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -2Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp

Interior LightingInstrument Panel Illumination

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy Lamps .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting Features

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls



( ) pSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-Change

Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6 7Parade Dimming .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps

. Taillamps

. Parking Lamps

. License Plate Lamps

. Instrument Panel Lights

6-2 Lighting

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control off or on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically at

normal brightness, together with thefollowing:

P ki L

5 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thefollowing lamps. A warning chimesounds if the driver door is openedwhen the ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.

. Parking Lamps

. Taillamps


This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh

‐beam headlamps are on.

Fl h t P



. Parking Lamps

. Taillamps



; (Parking Lamps): Turns the

parking lamps on together with thefollowing:

. Taillamps




Headlamp High/ Low-Beam Changer

23 Headlamp High/Low ‐BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

Flash-to-Pass

This feature is used to signal tothe vehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow‐beam position, pull the turn

signal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Lighting 6-3

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp System

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

When the DRL are on, the regular headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps will not be on. Theinstrument panel and cluster willalso not be lit.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regular headlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theh dl ill l

Delayed Headlamps

Delayed headlamps provide aperiod of exterior lighting as youleave the area around the vehicle.This feature is activated when theheadlamps are on due to theautomatic headlamps control

feature, and when the ignition isturned off. The headlamps remainon until the exterior lamps control is



The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come onat a reduced brightness whenthe following conditions are met:

. The ignition is in the ON/RUNposition.

. The exterior lamps control isin AUTO.

. The engine is running.

headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will go off and theDRL will come on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel because itworks with the DRL.

pmoved to the parking lamps positionor until the pre-selected delayedheadlamp lighting period has ended.

If the ignition is turned off with theexterior lamp control in the parkinglamps or headlamps position, the

delayed headlamps cycle will notoccur.

To disable the delayed headlampsfeature or change the time of delay,see Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 40 .

6-4 Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panel

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb

is not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 10 ‑ 30 .



| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button located on the

instrument panel below the audiosystem, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until the

arrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

p g

Turn Signal On Chime

If either one of the turn signals is lefton and the vehicle has been drivenmore than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimewill sound.

Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

Courtesy Lamps

The courtesy lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened.The lamps can also be turned onmanually by fully turning theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise.

The reading lamps, located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror,can be turned on or off

The lamps can also be turned onand off by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwiseto the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override



The instrument panel brightnessknob is located on the instrument

panel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Push the knob in allthe way until it extends out and thenturn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights. Push the knob back inwhen finished.

can be turned on or off independently of the automaticcourtesy lamps, when the doors areclosed.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in the

overhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps come on when adoor is opened, unless the domelamp override button is pressed in.

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E DOME OFF (Dome LampOverride): Press the top of thebutton in and the dome lampsremain off when a door is opened.

6-6 Lighting

An indicator light on the buttoncomes on to show that the domelamps are off. Press near the bottomof the button so the dome lampscome on when a door is opened.

Reading Lamps

Press the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry Lighting

For vehicles with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a set

time whenever " is pressed on the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

If a door is opened, the lamps stay

When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which means thecourtesy lamps will not come onunless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry Lighting

Delayed entry lighting illuminates

the interior for a period of time after all the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayed



on while it is open and then turn off automatically about 20 seconds

after the door is closed. If " is

pressed and no door is opened,the lamps turn off after about20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps do not turnoff at the end of the delay time.Instead, they slowly dim and thengo out. The delay time is canceled if the ignition key is turned to ON/RUNor the power door lock switch ispressed. The lamps will dim

right away.

g yentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one of thefollowing occurs:

. The ignition is in ON/RUN.

. The doors are locked.

. An illumination period of about25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period is canceled andthe interior lamps remain on.

Lighting 6-7

Delayed Exit Lighting

Delayed exit lighting illuminates theinterior for a period of time after thekey is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When the keyis removed, interior illumination

activates and remains on until oneof the following occurs:

. The ignition is in ON/RUN

Parade Dimming

This feature automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrument paneldisplays in daylight while theheadlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Battery LoadManagement

Th hi l h El t i P

has a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning



. The ignition is in ON/RUN.

. The power door locks areactivated.

. An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remainon because a door is open.

The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehicle

(alternator) may not be spinningfast enough at idle to produce allof the power needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

6-8 Lighting

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power whenever needed. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of some

accessories.Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels without being

Battery Power Protection

This feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if theinterior courtesy lamps or readinglamps are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on,they automatically turn off after

10 minutes, if the ignition is off. Thelamps will not come back on againuntil one of the following occurs:



steps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY

VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays,it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 24 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5 ‑ 29.

. The ignition is turned on.

. The exterior lamps control isturned off, then on again.

The headlamps will time out after 10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on while the ignition is onor off.

Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIn fo ta in me n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -2Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM FM R di 7 7

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15MP3 (Radios with

CD/USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22MP3 (Radios with

CD/DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment

(RSE) System 7 36

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Trademarks and LicenseAgreements

Trademarks and License Ag re e me n ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -5 4



AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Sa te l l i te Ra d io . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -8Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

(RSE) System .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

7-2 Infotainment System

Introduction

Infotainment

Read the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road for

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:

. Become familiar with theoperation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speaker

adjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see Defensive

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate navigationmanual.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

TheftLock® is designed to

discourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).



extended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

Driving on page 9‑ 3 .

The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power

(RAP) on page 9‑ 19 for more

information.

The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.


Operation



Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB Similar


Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7 ‑ 36 for moreinformation on the RSE system.

The DVD player is the top slot onthe radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD Audio or DVDVideo media. DTS and DTS Digital

Surround are registered trademarksof Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Manufactured under license from



Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port

The vehicle may have one of theseradios as its audio system.

Radios with CD, DVD, and USB

Radios with CD, DVD, and USBhave a Bose® Surround SoundSystem. Some of the features are

explained later in this sectionunder “ Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade).”

If the vehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system, it hasa CD, DVD, and USB radio. See

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turn

the system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

For vehicles with a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System, pressand hold for more than two secondsto turn off the entire radio and RSEsystem and to start the parentalcontrol feature. Parental control


prevents the rear seat occupantfrom operating the Rear Seat Audio(RSA) system or remote control.

A lock symbol displays next to theclock display while the parentalcontrol feature is being used. The

feature remains on until O is

pressed and held for more thantwo seconds, or the driver turns theignition off and exits the vehicle.

4 (Information): Press to switch

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service,CD, MP3, and WMA features): If additional information is availablefor the current song being played, Auto Text will automatically page/ scroll the information everyfive seconds above the FAV presetson the radio display.

To activate Auto Text:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu

compensate for road and wind noiseas the vehicle speeds up or slowsdown, so that the volume level isconsistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume.

2. Press the MENU button to

display the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM (automatic



4 (Information): Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.When the ignition is in the OFF

position, press 4 to display the time.

For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA,

or RDS features, press 4 to displayadditional text information related tothe current FM-RDS or XM station;or CD, MP3, or WMA song.If information is available during XM,CD, MP3, or WMA playback, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottom

line. When information is notavailable, “NO INFO” displays.

setup menu.

2. Press the softkey under the AUTO TXT tab on the radiodisplay.

3. Press the softkey under the ONtab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song title or

artist information is longer thanwhat can be displayed, the extrainformation will page everyfive seconds when Auto Text isactivated.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): The Speed Compensated

Volume (SCV) feature automaticallyadjusts the radio volume to

(volume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under theSpeed Compensated Volumesetting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. Pressthe softkey located below theBACK tab on the MENU SETUPdisplay or let the display time outafter approximately 10 seconds.Each higher setting allowsfor more radio volumecompensation at faster vehiclespeeds.


Setting the Tone (Bass/ Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press f until the tone control

tabs display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlight

the tab, or press the softkeyunder the tab

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey under the BASS,MID, or TREB tab for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds andthe level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all tone and

speaker controls to the middle

position, press f for more than

two seconds until a beep sounds.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press f until the speaker control

tabs display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe tab, or press the softkeyunder the tab.



under the tab.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thelevels are obtained:

. Turn f clockwise or

counterclockwise.

. Press \ FWD, or s REV.

If a station's frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble.

p

EQ (Equalization): Press tochoose bass and treble equalizationsettings designed for different typesof music. The choices are pop, rock,country, talk, jazz, and classical.Selecting MANUAL or changingbass or treble, returns the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thelevels are obtained:

. Turn f clockwise or

counterclockwise.

. Press \ FWD, or s REV.

To quickly adjust balance or fade tothe middle position, press thesoftkey under the BAL or FADE tabfor more than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.


To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,

press f for more than two seconds

until a beep sounds.

Radios with CD and DVD fadedifferently depending on the DVDMedia type:

.

With DVD‐ A 5.1 Surroundmedia, the left front andright front speakers faderearward leaving the center

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory.

If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to your

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The Radio Data System (RDS)feature is available for use only on

FM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works when



rearward, leaving the center front speakers unaffected untilthe last fade step, then all frontspeakers mute.

. With DVD‐V 5.1 Surroundmedia, surround sound is

maintained until Step 4 of theFade control is reached whilefading rearward. At that point theaudio system output changes toStereo to prevent the loss of Center channel output when thefull rearward fade position isreached.

and it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the TheftLock® system haslocked up the radio. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

ythe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radio

features to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.


© SEEK and ¨ SEEK : Press to goto the previous or next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold ©or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio

goes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the next

station. Press either arrow again tostop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans

tabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Pressto go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted arestored with the favorite stations.

To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number of

favorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.



stations with a strong signal that arein the selected band.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set up

their radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 ‑ 2 .

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeys

below the radio station frequency

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the page tostore the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

4. Press FAV, or let the menutime out, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabsand to begin the process of programming favorites for the

chosen number of favoritespages.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XM

Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free


music, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. If XM Service needs to bereactivated, the radio will display“No Subscription Please Renew” onchannel XM1. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.com

or 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding a Station

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM stations when the

radio is in the XM mode. To find XMchannels within a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XMf di l

5. To go to the next or previousXM station within the selectedcategory, do one of thefollowing:

. Turn f.

. Press the buttons below theright or left arrows on the

display.. Press either SEEK arrow.

6. To exit the category search



Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radio

stations.© SEEK and ¨ SEEK : Press to goto the previous or next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold© or ¨ until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either arrow again to

stop scanning.

frequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display thecategory tabs.

3. Continue pressing CAT until thedesired category name displays.

. Radios with CD and DVDcan also navigate thecategory list by pressings REV or \ FWD.

4. Press either of the two buttonsbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station associated with thatcategory.

g ymode, press the FAV button or BAND button to display thefavorites again.

Undesired XM categories can beremoved through the setup menu.

To remove an undesired category,perform the following:


2. Press the softkey below the XMCAT tab.

3. Turn f to display the category to

be removed.


4. Press the softkey under theRemove tab until the categoryname along with the wordRemoved displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can be

restored by pressing the softkeyunder the Add tab when a removedcategory is displayed or by pressingthe softkey under the Restore

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press togo through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite

stations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number of

favorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4 P FAV l t th



All tab.

Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Storing a Radio Station as a

Favorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 ‑ 2 .

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the page tostore the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radio

station to be stored as a favorite.

4. Press FAV, or let the menutime out, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabsand to begin the process of programming favorites for the

chosen number of favoritespages.

XM™ Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.


XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking the

XM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

L di XM Th di t i

If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot be

d b t hi l If thi



Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text or

informational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or

swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio eight‐digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.


Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have a

fault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio Reception

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in

and out.

AM

The range for most AM stations is

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in and

out. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time



Frequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into the

accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory power outlet.

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stations

boost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

of the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle'sradio. This interference may occur

when making or receiving phonecalls, charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.


Multi-Band Antenna

The multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. This typeof antenna is used with the AM/FMradio, as well as OnStar and the XMSatellite Radio Service System,if the vehicle has these features.Keep this antenna clear of snowand ice build up for clear radioreception. If the vehicle has asunroof, the performance of theradio system may be affected if the

Audio Players

CD Player

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Z EJECT: Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. A beep sounds and

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release to

resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playback



radio system may be affected if thesunroof is open. Loading items ontothe roof of the vehicle can interferewith the performance of the radiosystem and, if the vehicle has thisfeature, OnStar. Make sure the

multi-band antenna is notobstructed.

Ejecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, after several seconds, the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press © togo to the start of the current track,if more than 10 seconds on the CD

have played. Press ¨ SEEK to go to

the next track.

and hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turn off random play.


BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.

. When a CD is in the player,the CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber display.

. If an auxiliary input device is not

surface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,

load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.



connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their original cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans the

bottom surface of the disc. If the

gand clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD; itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radioswith CD/USB) on page 7 ‑ 22 or MP3 (Radios with CD/DVD) on page 7 ‑ 28 .


CD Messages

Check Disc: Radios with a singleCD player display Check Disc and/ or eject the CD if an error occurs.

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc was

inserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealer

If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the player, it staysin the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source. TheCD is controlled by the buttons onthe radio faceplate or by the RSA

unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7 ‑ 45 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks(the upper slot is the DVD deck andthe lower slot is the CD deck) are



or disc EJECT problems.

. It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. When

the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

CD/DVD Player

Playing a CD (In Either the

DVD or CD Slot)Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.(Loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat, ranges from five to20 seconds for a CD, and up to30 seconds for a DVD to begin

playing.)

the lower slot is the CD deck) arecompatible with most audio CDs,CD-Rs, CD-RWs, and MP3/WMAs.

When a CD is inserted, the textlabel DVD or CD symbol displays onthe left side of the radio display. Aseach new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

Z CD (Eject): Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. The disc ejects from thebottom slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.


If the disc is not removed, after several seconds, the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc that iscurrently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc

displays.If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject press and

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release to

resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playback

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing. TheCD or DVD remains inside the radiofor future listening or viewing.

DVD/CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Press toselect between DVD, CD,or Auxiliary.

. If an auxiliary input device isnot connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays.

. When a disc is in either slot, theDVD/CD t t t b d



disc fails to eject, press and

holdZ DVD for more than

five seconds to force the disc toeject.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on

the CD that is currently playing.© and SEEK ¨ SEEK: Press© SEEK to go to the start of thecurrent track if the track has playedmore than five seconds. If the trackhas played less than five seconds,the previous track will play.

Press ¨ SEEK to go to the next

track.

and hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM tab untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turn off random play.

DVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapter number displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in both

the DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD/AUX button onlycycles between the two sourcesand does not indicate “No AuxInput Device.”

. If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD/AUXbutton cycles through allavailable options.


If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigate theCD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7 ‑ 34or “ Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7 ‑ 36 for moreinformation.

Care of CDs and DVDs

or scratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, take

a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wiping

t t f th t t

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,

load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If di l “CD



Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their original cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD player scans the bottom surface of thedisc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,

process starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a CD; itcould get caught in the CD or DVDplayer. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a descriptionlabel is needed, try labeling the topof the recorded CD with amarking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Radios with CD and DVDAudio Output

Only one audio source can be heardthrough the speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as DVDslot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack.

Press O to turn the radio on. The

radio can be heard through all of thevehicle speakers.


Front seat passengers can listento the radio (AM, FM, or XM) bypressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX toselect the CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged intothe radio’s front auxiliary input jackor the rear auxiliary jack, the front

seat passengers are able to listen toplayback from this source throughthe vehicle speakers. See Auxiliary Devices on page 7 ‑ 34 or “ Audio/ Vid (A/V) J k ” d R S t

or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radioswith CD/USB) on page 7 ‑ 22 or MP3 (Radios with CD/DVD) on page 7 ‑ 28 .

CD Messages

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOAD

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealer



Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7 ‑ 36 for more information.

In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakers

can be muted when the RSA power is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7 ‑ 45 for more information.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.

. It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

.

The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

Using the DVD Player

The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remote

control, the RSA system, or by thebuttons on the radio faceplate. See“Remote Control” under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7 ‑ 36 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7 ‑ 45 for more information.


The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/

RW media along with MP3 andWMA formats.

If an error message displays on thevideo screen or the radio, see “DVD

DVD. Also, see Clock on page 5 ‑ 8 for information on setting the clockand date.

© SEEK (Previous Track/ Chapter): Press to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.

Press © SEEK again to go to the

previous track or chapter. This

button may not work when the DVDis playing the copyright informationor the previews.

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter):

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press tofast forward the DVD. The radiodisplays the elapsed time and fastforwards five times the normalspeed. To stop fast forwarding,press again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the

previews.Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD.If the DVD is ejected, but notremoved, the player automatically

ll it b k i ft 15 d



Display Error Messages” under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7 ‑ 36 and “DVDRadio Error Messages” in thissection for more information.

Playing a DVD

f (Tune): Turn to change tracks ona CD or DVD, to manually tune aradio station, or to change clockor date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See theinformation earlier in this sectionspecific to the radio, CD, and the

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter):

Press to go to the next track or chapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressto quickly reverse the DVD atfive times the normal speed. Theradio displays the elapsed timewhile in fast reverse. To stop fastreversing, press again. This buttonmay not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.

pulls it back in after 15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a DVDcannot be completed because of anunknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold for

more than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the softkeys under any iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.


A rear seat passenger can navigatethe DVD-V menus and controlsthrough the remote control. See“Remote Control” under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7 ‑ 36 for more information. TheVideo Screen automatically turns onwhen the DVD-V is inserted into theDVD slot.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause icon displayed onthe radio system, to toggle betweenpausing or restarting playback of

automatically, press the softkeyunder the play/pause icon displayedon the radio. If the DVD still doesnot play, refer to the on-screeninstructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu The DVD menu is

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio

display menu shows several icons.Press the softkeys under any iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.

A t i t



pausing or restarting playback of a DVD.

. If the forward arrow is showing,the system is in pause mode.

. If the pause icon is showing, the

system is in playback mode.. If the DVD screen is off, press

the play button to turn thescreen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after thepreviews have finished, althoughthere could be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD does

not begin playing the movie

DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thesoftkeys under the navigationarrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a selection, press this

button. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

A rear seat passenger can navigatethe DVD-A menus and controlsthrough the remote control. See“Remote Control” under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on

page 7 ‑

36 for more information.The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when theDVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.It must be manually turned on bythe rear seat passenger through theremote control power button.


r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause icon displayed onthe radio system, to toggle betweenpausing or restarting playback of a DVD.

. If the forward arrow is showing,the system is in pause mode.

.

If the pause icon is showing, thesystem is in playback mode.

q Group r : Press to cyclethrough musical groupings on theDVD A disc

media. The player starts loading thedisc into the system and shows“Loading Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio displaysa softkey menu of option(s). Somediscs automatically play the moviewhile others default to the softkeymenu display, which requires thePlay, Enter, or Navigation softkeysto be pressed; either by the softkeyon the radio or by the rear seatpassenger using the remote control.

It may take up to 30 seconds for a

. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V,press the DVD/CD AUX buttonto make DVD-V the activesource.

To resume DVD playback, do one of the following:

. Press r / j on the remote

control.

. Press the softkey under theplay/pause icon displayed on theradio



DVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle

through audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc. Thevideo screen shows the audiostream changing.

Inserting a Disc

To play a disc, gently insert the disc,with the label side up, into theloading slot. The DVD player might

not accept some paper labeled

It may take up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.

Stopping and Resuming Playback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press c on the remote control.

. Press the softkey under thestop or the play/pause iconsdisplayed on the radio.

radio.

The DVD should resume play fromwhere it last stopped if the dischas not been ejected and the stopbutton has not been pressed twice

on the remote control. If the dischas been ejected or the stop buttonhas been pressed twice on theremote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a Disc

Press Z DVD on the radio to eject

the disc. If a disc is ejected from theradio, but not removed, the radioreloads the disc after a short period


of time. The disc is stored in theradio. The radio does not resumeplay of the disc automatically. If themovie is reloaded and the RSAsystem is sourced to the DVD, theplayer begins to play again. If loading and reading a DVD or CD cannot be completed, andthe disc fails to eject, press and

holdZ DVD for more than

five seconds to force the disc toeject.

DVD E M

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present

whenZ DVD or DVD/CD/AUX is

pressed on the radio.

MP3 (Radios withCD/USB)

FormatRadios that have the capability of playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD R CD RW di Th fil

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3/WMA files. If bothformats are on the disc, the radioplays both file formats in the order in which they were recorded to

the disc.CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:



DVD Error Messages

Player Error: This messagedisplays when there are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

CD-R or CD-RW disc. The filescan be recorded with the followingfixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps,

192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and320 kbps or a variable bit rate.

Radios that have a USB port canplay.mp3 and .wma files stored on aUSB storage device as well as AACfiles that are stored on an iPod.

The radio supports:

. Up to 50 folders.

. Up to eight folders in depth.

. Up to 15 playlists.

. Up to 512 files and folders.

. Playlists with an .m3u or.wplextension.

. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cdafile extension.


USB Supported File and Folder Structure

The radio supports:

. Up to 700 folders.


. Up to 65,535 files.

.

Folder and file names up to64 bytes.

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma fileextension.

AAC fil t d iP d

root directory called CD accessesall of the CD audio tracks onthe disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of PlayCompressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:

. Playlists (Px).

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the

display does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.



. AAC files stored on an iPod.

. FAT16

. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays on theradio as the CD label.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files, a folder under the

Playlists (Px).

. Files stored in the root directory.

. Files stored in folders in the rootdirectory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:

. Play begins from the first track inthe first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present in

the ID3 tag, the radio displays thefile name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename do not display.


Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containing

compressed audio song files.Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.

Release s REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of the

file displays. Release\ FWD to

resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays.

displays to play songs in randomorder. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press the

softkey belowh to play files in

order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort the

files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while it



the radio with a USB port.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

Sc (Previous Folder): Press

the softkey below Sc to go to the

first track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the

softkey belowc T to go to the first

track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Files on the disccan be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To userandom, press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random Current Disc

is scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey below either arrowtab. The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.


Continue pressing either softkeybelow the arrow tab until the artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below the SortBy tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the main

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod ®

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the other end to the USB port located inthe instrument panel storagearea. If the vehicle is on and theUSB connection works, “OK todisconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPodappears on the radio's display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.



Back tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current album

begins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the player moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB port

located in the instrument panelstorage area. See Instrument Panel Storage on page 4‑ 1 for moreinformation.

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPod

automatically powers off and willnot charge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the AuxiliaryInput Jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See Clock on page 5 ‑ 8 for more information.


Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs and displaysong information on the radio’sdisplay.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reduced

volume. Release\ FWD to


4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about the

selected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The fi e softke s belo the radio

j (Pause): Press the softkey

below j to pause the track. The tab

appears raised when pause is being

used. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theBack tab to go back to the main

display screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press the

softkey belowc to view the



moving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue moving

forward through tracks.s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.


The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.


contents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc .

2. Turn f to scroll through the list

of folders.

3. Press f to select the folder.

If there is more than one folder,repeat Steps 1 and 2 until thefolder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the files

in the selected folder.


5. Press f to select the file to be

played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:

. First softkey, first item in the list.

. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Genres

. Songs

. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh .


of menus.

3. Press f to select the menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through the

folders or files in the


. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or '

to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.





h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view and

select a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

folders or files in theselected menu.


played.



. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkey

below" to repeat all tracks. The

tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default

mode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press the

softkey below' to repeat one

track. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.


Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,

C, or = to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Shuffles all songs on the

MP3 (Radios withCD/DVD)

Format

The radio can play.mp3 or.wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

The USB port can play.mp3and .wma files stored on a USBstorage device as well as AAC filesstored on an iPod.

Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode

CAT (category) button to togglebetween uncompressed audio andMP3/WMA files.

CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The DVD Player supports:



. Up to 15 playlists.

. Up to 40 sessions.

. Playlists with an m3u or wpl



Songs): Shuffles all songs on theUSB storage device or iPod.

C (Shuffle Album): Shufflesall songs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

pDiscs

The radio plays discs that containboth uncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files depending on which

slot the disc is loaded into.The DVD Player only readsuncompressed audio and ignoresMP3/WMA files on a mixedmode disc.

The CD Player reads bothuncompressed audio and MP3/ WMA files on a mixed mode disc.Uncompressed audio is played

before MP3/WMA files. Press the

. Playlists with an .m3u or.wplextension.


The CD Player supports:. Up to 512 files and folders.


. Playlists with an .m3u or .wplextension.



USB Supported File and Folder Structure

The radio supports:



. Up to 65,535 files.

. Folder and file names up to64 bytes.

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma fileextension.

. AAC files stored on an iPod.

root directory called CD accessesall of the CD audio tracks onthe disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

No Folder When the disc contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder function

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:

. Playlists.

. Files stored in the root directory.

. Files stored in folders in the rootdirectory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:

. Play begins from the first track inthe first playlist and continues

ti ll th h ll t k i



AAC files stored on an iPod.

. FAT16

. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays asF1 ROOT on the radio.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files, a folder under the

next and previous folder functiondoes not function on a disc that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

When the disc contains onlyplaylists and compressed audiofiles, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. Thefolder down and the folder upbuttons search playlists first andthen go to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

sequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.


When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is the

song name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present inthe ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

playlists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playing an MP3/WMA FileFrom a Disc (In Either the DVDor CD Slot)

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turn

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.


\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of the



( p )

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension

of the filename do not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists createdusing WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,or Real Jukebox™ software can beaccessed; however, they cannot beedited using the radio. These

on the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only).

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA

files.© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than five secondshave played. Press to go to theprevious track if less thanfive seconds have played. Pressand hold or press multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughtracks.

volume and the elapsed time of the

file displays. Release \ FWD to


Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the

softkey belowc T to go to the first

track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Files on the disccan be listened to in random, rather

than sequential order. To use


random, press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random Current Discdisplays to play songs in randomorder. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press the

softkey belowh to play files in

order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.

alphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below the SortBy tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the main

i i t

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod ®



on the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order by

artist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes to

the next or previous artist in

music navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current album

begins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the player moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the instrument panelstorage area. See Instrument Panel Storage on page 4‑ 1 for moreinformation.

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.


To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the other end to the USB port located inthe instrument panel storage area.If the vehicle is on and the USBconnection works, “OK todisconnect” and a GM logo may

appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it is

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs and displaysong information on the radio’sdisplay.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reduced

volume. Release\ FWD to


4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about the

selected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radio



The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPod

automatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See Clock on page 5 ‑ 8 for more information.

moving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue moving

forward through tracks.s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.


The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

ydisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.


j (Pause): Press the softkey

below j to pause the track. The tab

appears raised when pause is being

used. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theBack tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press the



played.



. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.


. Fourth softkey 10% through the

. Genres

. Songs

. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh .


of menus.3. Press f to select the menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through the

folders or files in thel d



contents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc .


of folders.

3. Press f to select the folder.

If there is more than one folder,repeat Steps 1 and 2 until thefolder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the files

in the selected folder.

Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.


h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view and

select a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

selected menu.


played.



. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.





Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or '

to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkey

below" to repeat all tracks. The

tab appears lowered when Repeat

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,

C, or = to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Shuffles all songs on theUSB t d i iP d

Auxiliary Devices

The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack locatedon the lower right side of thefaceplate and for vehicles with aUSB port, it is located in theinstrument panel storage area.

Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

The auxiliary input jack is located onthe lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not

l h d h t i t th f t



tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

'(Repeat Track): Press the

softkey below' to repeat one

track. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

USB storage device or iPod.

C (Shuffle Album): Shuffles allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

plug a headphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. Connect anauxiliary input device such as aniPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,

CD player, or cassette tape player to the auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑ 3 for more information on driver distraction.


To use an auxiliary input device,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the volume of theportable player. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be made

from the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing so you might

DVD/CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Press toselect between DVD, CD,or Auxiliary.

. If an auxiliary input device isnot connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays.

. When a disc is in either slot, theDVD/CD text tab and a message

showing the track or chapter number display.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot,

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigate theCD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See Clock on page 5 ‑ 8 or “ Audio/ Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat

Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7 ‑ 36 for more information.

Using the USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port,the connector is located in the



continues playing, so you mightwant to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.

. When a CD is in the player theCD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

the DVD/CD/AUX button onlycycles between the two sourcesand does not indicate “No AuxInput Device.”

. If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD/AUXbutton cycles through allavailable options.

the connector is located in theinstrument panel storage area.See Instrument Panel Storage on page 4‑ 1 for more information.

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPodusing the radio buttons and knobs.See MP3 (Radios with CD/USB) on page 7 ‑ 22 or MP3 (Radios with CD/ DVD) on page 7 ‑ 28 for informationabout how to connect and control aUSB storage device or an iPod.


USB Supported Devices

. USB Flash Drives

. Portable USB Hard Drives

. Fifth generation or later iPod

. iPod nano

. iPod touch

.

iPod classicNot all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for proper

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System

The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.

The RSE system works with thevehicle's audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio. TheRSE system includes a radio with aDVD player, a video display screen,audio/video jacks two wireless

In severe or extreme weather conditions, the RSE system might or might not work until the temperatureis within the operating range. Theoperating range for the RSE systemis above −20°C (−4°F) or below60°C (140°F). If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range,heat or cool the vehicle until the

temperature is within the operatingrange of the RSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have aP t l C t l f t d di



pp p poperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/ itunes.

For help identifying your iPod, go towww.apple.com/support.

audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.See Operation on page 7 ‑ 3 for moreinformation on the vehicle's

infotainment system.Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

Parental Control feature, dependingon the radio. To enable ParentalControl, press and hold the radiopower button for more than

two seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While

Parental Control is on, Q displays.

When the radio is turned back on,Parental Control is unlocked.


Headphones The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSAselections. These headphones areused to listen to media such asCDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As,radio, any auxiliary source

connected to A/V jacks, or theauxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have a power button,channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volumecontrol Switch the headphones off

the batteries might need to bereplaced. Intermittent sound or staticon the headphones can also be anindication of weak batteries. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection for more information.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volume controllocated on the right side.

Infrared transmitters are located atthe rear of the RSE overheadconsole. The headphones shut off automatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSA



A. Battery cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 switch

C. Power button

D. Volume control

E. Power indicator light

control. Switch the headphones off when not in use.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator light

located on the headphones comeson. If the light does not come on,

power if the RSE system and RSAare shut off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes. Moving toofar forward or stepping out of thevehicle, can cause the headphonesto lose the audio signal.


For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception. Thesymbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appears

on the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positioned onthe right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or direct

To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Headphones should be stored in thefront floor console and not in thefront seat back pocket. Headphonedamage can occur when the secondrow seats are folded forward.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on the left

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks



sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold can

weaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool, dryplace.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn or damaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.

battery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slidethe battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in the

compartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

A. Yellow: Video Input

B. White: Left Audio Input

C. Red: Right Audio Input

The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment.


The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console, allow audioor video signals to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such asa camcorder or a video game unitto the RSE system. Adapter connectors or cables (not supplied)might be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks.

Refer to the manufacturer ’sinstructions for proper usage.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of the

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu by using the remote control.To change a setting:

1. Press z .

2. Use n ,q, p,o and r to

navigate and use thesetup menu.

z

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7 ‑ 45 for more information.



y pRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The radio can listento the audio of the connectedauxiliary device by sourcing toauxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on

page 7 ‑ 34 for more information.

3. Press z again to remove the

setup menu from the screen.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following sources:

. Wireless headphones

. Vehicle speakers

. Vehicle‐wired headphone jackson the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.

When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack, if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.


Video Screen

The video screen is located in theoverhead console. When the videoscreen is not in use, push it up intoits locked position.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on; this is normal

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section for more information.

Remote Control

ability of the RSE transmitter toreceive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control doesnot seem to be working, thebatteries might need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section. Objects blocking theline of sight could also affect thefunction of the remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD

slot, the remote control O button

can be used to turn on the videoscreen display and start the disc.The radio can also turn on the video



screen remains on; this is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.

PressP on the remote control or

eject the disc to turn off the screen.The infrared receivers for thewireless headphones and theremote control are located at therear of the overhead console.

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rear of the overhead console and press thedesired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light could affect the

screen display. See Operation on page 7 ‑ 3 for more information.

Notice: Storing the remote

control in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.


Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turn theremote control backlight on. Thebacklight automatically times outafter seven to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while the

backlight is on.v (Title): Press to return the DVDto the main menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to access

z (Display Menu): Press to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode(normal, full, or zoom), and displaythe language menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the display

menu or a DVD menu is active.c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.Press twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to start

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press to return to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Press againto go to the previous track or chapter. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

u(Next Track/Chapter): Press togo to the beginning of the next

chapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.



the DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor around the DVD menu. After

making a selection press the enter button. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

n ,q ,p ,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoice that is highlighted inany menu.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press while a DVDis playing to pause it. Press again tocontinue playing the DVD.

When the DVD is playing,depending on the radio, play may

be slowed down by pressing s

then[. The DVD continues playing

in a slow play mode. Depending onthe radio, perform reverse slow play

by pressing s then r. To cancel

slow play mode, press s again.

r (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD. Tostop fast reversing a DVD video,

press s. To stop fast reversing aDVD audio or CD, release r. This

button might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast

forwarding a DVD video, press s.


To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio

or CD, release [. This button might

not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.

The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/ OFF subtitles and to move throughsubtitle options when a DVD isplaying. The format and content of

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press withinthree seconds after entering anumeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressto select chapter or track numbersgreater than nine. Press this buttonbefore entering the number.

If the remote control becomes lostor damaged a new universal

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, using

the diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove the



playing. The format and content of this function vary for each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe system between the DVD player

and an auxiliary source.2 (Camera): Press to changecamera angles on DVDs that havethis feature when a DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

or damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses a

Toshiba

®

code set.

o a o g pe od o t e, e o e t ebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.


Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen. There are blackborders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or thepicture looks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings in the setup menu bypressing the display menu button on the remote control.

In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between theremote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly.



After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimesthe DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If thestop button was pressed two times, the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.

The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.


Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)

Problem Recommended Action

Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use acellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly using theL (left) and R (right) on the headphones.

The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD

player.

DVD Display Error Messages Disc Region Error: This message DVD Distortion



DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen might display

one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This message

displays if no disc is present whenthe Z EJECT button is pressed on

the radio.

DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems

(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobilefaxes, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar ® System.


Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video Screen

Use only a clean cloth dampened

with clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System

CD and listen to it through theheadphones, while the driver listensto the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The RSA functions operate evenwhen the main radio is off. The front

audio system displaysX

when theRSA is on, and disappears from thedisplay when it is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If the

audio system. Turn the iPod on,then choose the front auxiliaryinput with the RSA SRCE button.

P (Power): Press to turn the RSAff



y

For vehicles with Rear Seat Audio(RSA), rear seat passengers canlisten to and control any of the

music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,or other auxiliary sources. The rear seat passengers can only controlthe music sources the front seatpassengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dualcontrol is allowed). For example,rear seat passengers can control a

vehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the RSA audio isactive through the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input(if available), located on the front

on or off.

Volume: Turn to increase or todecrease the volume of the wired

headphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio (AM/FM), CD,and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.


© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to theprevious or next station and staythere. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

Press and hold © or ¨ until the

display flashes to tune to an

individual station. The display stopsflashing after the buttons have notbeen pushed for more thantwo seconds. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio

When a DVD video menu is being

displayed, press © or ¨ to perform a

cursor up or down on the menu.

Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursor left

or right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to go tothe next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio. This

function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the CD or DVD audio.

Phone

Bluetooth

For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:

. Placement and receipt of calls ina hands-free mode.

. Sharing of the cell phone’saddress book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,



to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press ¨ to

go to the next track or chapter on

the disc. Press © to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter (if more than 10 seconds haveplayed). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

g gThis function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer, press PROG toselect the next disc, if multiple discsare loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press PROG to performthe ENTER menu function.

,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:

. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.


. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section

for more information.. See “Storing and Deleting Phone

Numbers” in this section for more information.

{ WARNING

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth‐capable cell phone with aHands‐Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,

and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

Th Bl t th t i

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, to



{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long or

too often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking your eyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

, g ,change the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To prevent

missed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.


Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls on page 5 ‑ 2 for more information.

b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirm

system information, and startspeech recognition.

c / x (Phone On Hook): Pressto end a call, reject a call, or cancelan operation.

Pairing

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and holdb / g for

two seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four ‐digitPersonal Identification Number (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide



Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetooth

system and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStar Overview on page 14‑ 1 for moreinformation.

is deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

user guide.

5. Locate the device named “Your Vehicle” in the list on the cell

phone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3. After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. The system responds


with “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair additional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phones

paired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”

after that phone name.


two seconds

3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in the

order in which all the available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.

1 Press and holdb / g for

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems, if equipped.

The following commands are used

to delete and store phone numbers.Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group of numbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as a



two seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”


two seconds.



two seconds.


3. Say “Change phone.”

. If another cell phone isfound, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

a phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStar Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.


Using the “Store” Command


two seconds.

2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag for this number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say

repeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


two seconds.

2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


two seconds.

2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands



“Clear ” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbers

recognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


two seconds.

2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. After each digit is entered, the system

g gCommand

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStar Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


two seconds.

2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

following commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be used

interchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.


Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


two seconds.

2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed by

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


two seconds.

2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”

Once connected, the person called

Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc / x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer an

incoming call when another



phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time. After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit it

heard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear ” at any time to clear the lastnumber.


Using the“

Re‐dial

”Command


two seconds.

2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


gcall is active. The original callis placed on hold.

.

Pressb

/ g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc / x to disconnect the

current call and switch to the callon hold.


Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.

2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,

press b / g to link all callers

together.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g, and

then say “Mute call.”

.

To cancel mute, pressb

/ g,and then say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.

2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to the

Bluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on the

cell phone, press b / g. The audio

transfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, use



Ending a Call

Pressc / x to end a call.

phone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetooth

system before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

the audio transfer feature on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for more

information.


Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:

1. Press and holdb / g for two seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK accessing

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system. Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The system

responds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a Paired

Phone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG Inc and any use of such marks



responds OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal prompt

messages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tag

to send.

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade names

are those of their respective owners.See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 ‑ 20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending DTS and DTS Digital

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright1992-2010 Dolby Laboratories. Allrights reserved.



pending. DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksand the DTS logos and Symbol

are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2010 DTS, Inc. All RightsReserved.

Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate Control

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Rear Climate Control System

(Rear Climate

Control Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Rear Climate Control System

(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Air Vents Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.



MaintenancePassenger Compartment Air

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

A. Fan Control



D. Air Conditioning


F. Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger

9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the

way counterclockwise to turn thefront climate control system off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.

8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature of the air flowingfrom the system.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

By positioning the right knobbetween two modes, a combinationof those two modes is selected.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel and

automatically selects outside air.Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in floor mode.

- (Defog): This clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation and

runs the air conditioning unless theoutside temperature is less than 4°C(40°F). Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defog mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

0 (Defrost): This clears the

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes onwhen A/C is on. The air conditioningsystem does not operate when theoutside temperature is below 4°C(40°F). The indicator light flashesthree times and turns off whenoutside conditions affect air

conditioning operation. This isnormal.

For quicker cool down on hot days:

1. Open the windows to let hot air escape.

2 SelectH mode



between the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtoward the windshield and side

window outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system

0 (Defrost): This clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to the

windshield and side window vents,with some to the floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled insidethe vehicle. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode.The air conditioning system runsautomatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is less than4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicleuntil all windows are clear.

2. SelectH mode.

3. Select# .

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

6. Close the windows after the hotair has escaped.

7. Once the vehicle's interior temperature is below the outside

temperature, select@ mode

for faster cooling.


Using recirculation for long periodsof time could cause the air insidethe vehicle to become too dry. Toprevent this from happening, after the inside of the vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehicle

while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off the recirculation mode

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defrost, or defoggingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The air conditioning also comes on whenthis mode is activated unless theoutside air temperature is less than4°C (40°F). While in recirculation

mode the windows can fog whenthe weather is cold and damp. Toclear the fog, select either the defogor defrost mode and increase thefan speed.

REAR (Rear Climate Control):Press to turn the rear heating and

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear windowdefogger stays on for about10 minutes, before automaticallyturning off. The defogger will alsoturn off when the engine isturned off.

Do not drive the vehicle until all

windows are clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of the

mirror when1 is pressed.

Notice: Do not use anything



is turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and must bere‐selected when the engine is

turned on again.This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

gair conditioning on or off. See Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) on page 8 ‑ 9or Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)on page 8 ‑ 10 .

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut

or damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.


Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Display Function

Each time the temperature, mode,or fan control buttons are pressed,the climate control display showsthat function along with the insidetemperature setting. The outsidetemperature is displayed on theinstrument panel cluster.

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.While the system is off, outside air still enters through the floor outlets,but the air delivery mode can beadjusted.

The climate control system will also



A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Recirculation


F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power (On/Off)

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

M. Passenger Side TemperatureControl

turn on if either the fan control,defrost, AUTO, or air conditioningbuttons are pressed.


Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): The systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

To use automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thecurrent temperature(s) selectedand AUTO is shown on thedisplay. The current air deliverymode and fan speed alsoappear for approximatelyfive seconds.

Wh AUTO i l t d th i

quickly cool the vehicle. Therecirculation indicator light willcome on.

2. Set the temperature for thedriver and passenger.

To find a comfortable setting,start with a 22°C (73°F)temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the systemto regulate. Use the driver sideor passenger side temperaturebuttons to adjust thetemperature setting asnecessary. The system willremain at the selected setting.Choosing the warmest or coolest

Temperature Control

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are used toadjust the temperature of the air coming through the system. Thetemperature can be adjusted evenif the system is turned off sinceoutside air still enters the vehicle,unless the recirculation mode is

selected. See “Recirculation” later inthis section.

Driver Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease the driver side temperature. The driver sidetemperature display will show the



When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning and air inlet areautomatically controlled. The air

conditioning runs when theoutside temperature is over 4°C (40°F). The system isautomatically set to outsideair, unless it is hot outside andthen the air inlet changes torecirculation mode to help

Choosing the warmest or coolesttemperatures does not cause thevehicle to heat or cool more

quickly.To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system delaysturning on the fan until warmair is available. Press the fancontrol to override this delay andselect the fan speed.

temperature display will show thetemperature setting.

Passenger Side Temperature

Control: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease thepassenger side temperature. Thepassenger side display will show thetemperature setting.

PASS (Passenger): Press to setthe passenger temperature to matchthe driver temperature setting.The PASS indicator will turn off.


When the passenger temperaturesetting is different than the driver setting, the PASS indicator comes on.

Manual Operation

The air delivery mode or fan speedcan be manually adjusted.

D / C (Fan Control): Press to

increase or decrease the fan speed.

Pressing D or C while in automatic

control places the fan speed under manual control.

The air delivery mode remains inautomatic control. The fan setting

system on. Press a mode buttonwhile in automatic control to placethe system into manual control.

The air delivery mode setting stilldisplays, but the word AUTO nolonger displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets and

i t th fl tl t

When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature isless than 4°C (40°F). Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows areclear.

0 (Defrost): Press to turn thedefrost on or off. This mode quickly

clears the windshield of fog or frost. Air is directed to the windshield,side window, and floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled insidethe vehicle. The air conditioningsystem runs automatically in thissetting, unless the outsidet t i l th 4°C (40°F)



gstill displays, but the word AUTOno longer displays, and the AUTO

button indicator light turns off.H / G (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.

Repeatedly press H or G until the

desired mode appears on thedisplay. Pressing a mode buttonwhile the system is off changes theair delivery mode without turning the

warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the

floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the systemuses outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.

temperature is less than 4°C (40°F).

Do not drive the vehicle until all the

windows are clear.While in defrost mode, if the PASSbutton is pressed, the PASS buttonindicator flashes three times toshow that the passenger climatecontrol system cannot be activated.If the passenger temperaturebuttons are adjusted while in defrostmode, the driver temperature


indicator will change. Thepassenger temperature will not bedisplayed.

When returning to bi-level, vent,or floor mode, the previoustemperature settings displays inplace of any change made while indefrost mode.

Air Conditioning# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C) onand off. An indicator light comes onwhen A/C is on.

The A/C does not work when theoutside temperature is below 4°C

On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let hot inside air escape.This helps reduce the time it takesfor the interior of the vehicle tocool down.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the

engine. This is normal.@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and must be

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The air conditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode thewindows can fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

REAR: Press to turn the rear heating and air conditioning on or off. See Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only)

8 9 R Cli t C t l



outside temperature is below 4 C

(40°F). If # is pressed the indicator

flashes three times and turns off to

show that the A/C mode is notavailable. If the A/C is on and theoutside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the A/Cindicator turns off to show that the A/C mode has been canceled.

yre‐selected when the engine isturned on again.

This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

on page 8 ‑ 9 or Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8 ‑ 10 .


Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear windowdefogger stays on for about10 minutes, before turning off. Thedefogger also turns off when theengine is turned off. Do not drive thevehicle until all the windows areclear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of the

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of the

The interior temperature sensor located on the instrument panel tothe right of the steering column,measures the temperature of the air i id th hi l



cleared from the surface of themirror when the rear window defogbutton is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

instrument panel, monitors the solar heat. Do not cover the solar sensor

or the system will not work properly.

inside the vehicle.

There is also an exterior

temperature sensor located behindthe front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature andhelps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover on thefront of the vehicle could cause afalse reading in the displayedtemperature.


The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the temperature, fanspeed, and air delivery mode. Thesystem may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing thesun. The recirculation mode will alsobe used as needed to maintain cooloutlet temperatures.

Rear Climate Control System (Rear ClimateControl Only)

A F C t l P th REAR b tt th f t



A. Fan Control



For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the center console. The system can also becontrolled with the front controls.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn the

rear climate control system on or off. An indicator comes on when therear system is on. The system alsoturns on if any of the rear controlsare adjusted.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.


Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted.

Fan Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the

knob to9 to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the airflowtemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnto the desired mode to change theairflow direction

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)

A F C t l P th REAR b tt th f t



airflow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed through

the overhead outlets.) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets,as well as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the center console.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn the

rear climate control system on or off. The system also turns on if any

of the rear controls, except C, are

pressed. An indicator comes onwhen the rear system is on.

The system can also be turned off,

by pressing and holding C.


Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted.

D andC (Fan Control): Press thefan up or down buttons to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Press +or − to increase or decrease theair temperature. The temperaturesettings will display in

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to manually change thedirection of the airflow. Repeatedlypress the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.

Air VentsUse the slider switch in the center of the outlet, to change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheelnear the outlet to control the amountof airflow or to shut off the airflow.

Keep all outlets open whenever possible for best system

performance.Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into thevehicle



settings will display in0‐12 increments, going from thecoolest (0) to the warmest (12)

setting.

vehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hood

deflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.


.

Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. If fogging reoccurs while in ventor bi-level modes with mildtemperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the air conditioner to reduce windshield

fogging.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir Filter

The filter removes dust, pollen,and other airborne irritants fromoutside air and inside air when inrecirculation mode.

To find out what type of replacementfilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑ 13 .

1. Open the glove box.



2. Twist the compartment

retainers (A) and pull outward toremove.

3. Lower the instrument panelcompartment assembly (B)beyond the stops.


4. If needed, unsnap theinstrument panel compartmentassembly (B) from theinstrument panel. Whenreinstalling, be sure theinstrument panel compartmentdampener arm is alignedproperly to the dampener gear assembly.

5. Squeeze the housing cover (A)tabs to remove.

6. Remove the old air filter from thepassenger compartment air filter housing (B)

7. Install the new air filter.8. Replace the housing cover.

9. If removed, reinstall theinstrument panel compartmentassembly.

10. Reinstall the compartmentretainers.

See your dealer if additional

assistance is needed.



housing (B).


2 NOTES



Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving .. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Control of a Vehicle .. . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery ............ 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads .. . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Wi t D i i 9 7

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking over Things

That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust .............. 9-21Running the Vehicle While

Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Tow/Haul Mode .............. 9-25

Dr ive Systems All-Wheel Drive .............. 9-26

Br akes

Ob ject Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-33Rear Vision

Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-39Gasoline Specifications (U.S.

and Canada Only) .......... 9-39

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-39Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Filling a Portable Fuel

Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

T i



Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle Load Limits .. . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Pa rk in g Bra k e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -2 7Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-28

Ride Contr ol SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

TowingGeneral Towing

In fo rma tio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -4 3Driving Characteristics and

Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Trailer Towing ................ 9-47Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted Driving

Distraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.

.

Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, suchas programming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment section

for more information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.



. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or other electronic devices.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.


Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wear the safety belt. See Safety Belts on page 3 ‑ 14.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,

perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride with

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

Braking

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding to

push the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three‐fourths of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot of



Focus on the task of driving.a driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

(66 ), c cou d be a o odistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.


If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up,it can take longer to stop and the

brake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulicpower steering. It may requiremaintenance See Power Steering

Variable Effort SteeringSome vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount of effort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speedsto make the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park.

At faster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-likefeel to the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steer than normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe s stem Yo ill still ha e po er

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

. There are some situations whensteering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of the



maintenance. See Power Steering Fluid on page 10 ‑ 19.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

the system. You will still have power steering, but steering will be stiffer

than normal at slow speeds. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn

180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.


Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Follow

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

.

Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or CorneringSkid — too much speed or steering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchth ttl th d i i

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust your

driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — such



gthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

g gas enough water, ice, or packed

snow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.


Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoid

driving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could cause

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be

very cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on the

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 10 ‑ 36 .

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway Hypnosis



pulling to one side. You could

lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

y ywater. This can happen if the road is

wet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Highway Hypnosis

Always be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:

. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

. Keep the interior temperature cool.


. Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

. Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips for

driving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when going

WARNING (Continued)

none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNINGCoasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. You

o ld then ha e poor braking or

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

. Be alert on top of hills,something could be in your lane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special road

signs (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice



g g gdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or even

(Continued)

would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

Drive carefully when there is snow

or ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.


Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drive

wheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑ 26 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance on

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside

Assistance Program (Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

WARNING (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:

. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,

especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from the



Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch for

slippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)

vehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speed

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

to the highest setting. See“Climate Control System” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑ 21.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most of

keeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is Stuck

Slowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

WARNING (Continued)

damage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10 ‑ 54.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any traction or stability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forward



the way to save heat. Repeat this

until help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. This

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or other

(Continued)

between R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little as

possible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedalwhile shifting, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal whenthe transmission is in gear.


Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle on page 10 ‑ 79.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Example Label

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label is



nonfactory-installed options.

Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

gattached to the center pillar

(B-pillar) of your vehicle. Withthe driver's door open, you willfind the label attached below thedoor lock post (striker). The tireand loading information labelshows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the


maximum vehicle capacityweight (B) in kilograms andpounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires on

page 10 ‑ 36 and Tire Pressureon page 10 ‑ 42 .

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle Weight

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this



y gRating (GVWR) and the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

reduces the available cargo

and luggage load capacity for your vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑ 47 for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.


Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight

Example 2



Example 3





p g@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =

136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

p g@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =

340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

p g@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =

453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).


Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this Be sure to spread

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can also



Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/ Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver's door.

you with this. Be sure to spread

out your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

shorten the life of the vehicle.


Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injure

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave an

unsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:

. If you have all-wheel drive,keep your speed at 88 km/h(55 mph) or less for the first805 km (500 mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttle



vehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

(Continued)

starts. Avoid downshifting to

brake or slow the vehicle.. Avoid making hard stops for

the first 322 km (200 mi) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this


breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9 ‑ 43 for thetrailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

In order to shift out of P (Park), theignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑ 19.

This position locks the ignition andtransmission. The key can be



ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/

ACCESSORY and the brake pedalmust be applied.

yremoved in LOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.


If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while the

vehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) to

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ ACCESSORY.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning the

the ignition and steering wheel. Usethis position if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

R (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition. If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition with the engine off the



shift lever must be in P (Park) to

turn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑ 27 .

key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this

does not work, then the vehicleneeds service.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisis the position in which you canoperate the electrical accessories or items plugged into the accessorypower outlets. This position unlocks

position with the engine off, the

battery could be drained. You maynot be able to start the vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

/ (START): This is the positionthat starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. Theignition switch will return to ON/RUNfor driving.


Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage the

transmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Do

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the

vehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be floodedwith too much gasoline. Trypushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key inSTART for up to a maximumof 15 seconds Wait at least



down as the engine warms. Do

not race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

g g ppby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.

of 15 seconds. Wait at least

15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.


If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with your dealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly Any

Engine Heater The engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and better fuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting. Some models

may have an internal thermostat inthe cord which will prevent enginecoolant heater operation attemperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2 Open the hood and unwrap the

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly grounded

three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engine



might not perform properly. Any

resulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the

electrical cord. The cord islocated on the driver side of theengine compartment. It is routedaround the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

it away from moving engine

parts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.


Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)

These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theignition key is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows

. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until adoor is opened.

The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

For an additional 10 minutes of operation close all the doors and

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine

running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑ 43 .

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running it



operation, close all the doors and

turn the key to ON/RUN and thenback to LOCK/OFF.

All these features will work when thekey is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY positions.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑ 27 for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the shiftlever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

vehicle with the engine running, it

could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and the


parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without firstpushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficult

If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle torelieve the parking pawl pressure,so you can shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of Park

The vehicle is equipped withan electronic shift lock releasesystem. The shift lock release isdesigned to:

. Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift lever button fully released, and

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting on page 10 ‑ 74 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever b tt i



done properly and then it is difficult

to shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/

ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery.

button again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealer.


Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,

or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areas

with poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is

coming into the vehicle:. Drive it only with the windows

completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or a



.

The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

area such as a garage or a

building that has no fresh air ventilation.


Running the VehicleWhile Parked

It is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed

area with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. For

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you

have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.



has no fresh air ventilation. For

more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑ 21.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑ 19.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑ 43 .

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.


{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left the

engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19 If you are pulling a

regular brake first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into another

gear. See Shifting out of Park on page 9‑ 20 .

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehicle

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.



page 9 19. If you are pulling a

trailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑ 43 .

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply the

not be covered by the vehicle

warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑ 9.

g g p

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.


D (Drive): This position is for

normal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:

. Going less than 56 km/h(35 mph), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or more, push the accelerator all

the way down.Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You candrive in L (Low) when you ared i i l th 56 k /h (35 h)

and performance. Use the brake to

hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not usethe accelerator pedal.

L (Low): This position gives youaccess to gear ranges. Thisprovides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than D (Drive).You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronic shift

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gear range available.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range.

The highest gear available for thispre-determined range is displayednext to the L in the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 24 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 29 for moreinformation. The number displayedin the DIC is the highest gear thatth t i i ill b ll d t



driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)and D (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.

If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,with your foot off the brake pedal,the vehicle may roll. This is normaland is due to the torque converter designed to improve fuel economy

The vehicle has an electronic shift

position indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicating thecurrent gear that has been selected.

the transmission will be allowed tooperate in. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle.


The transmission will not shift into

5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lower gear range if the engine speed is toohigh. You have a brief period of timeto slow the vehicle. If vehicle speedis not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shift

will not be completed. You mustfurther slow the vehicle, then pressthe − (Minus) button to the desiredlower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade Brakingis not available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive) for both normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise control

Tow/Haul Mode_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle mayhave a Tow/Haul mode.

The button is located on theinstrument panel under the climatecontrols.

Push the button to activate thesystem. Push it again to deactivatethe system. You can use this featureto assist when towing or hauling aheavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated theTow/Haul symbol will come on theinstrument panel cluster. See“Tow/Haul Mode” under Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9‑ 43 for more information.

Automatic Engine GradeBraking

Automatic Engine Grade Brakingassists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftschedule that uses the engine andthe transmission to slow the vehicle.The system will automaticallycommand downshifts to reducevehicle speed, until the brake pedalis no longer being pressed.

While in the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) mode, grade brakingis deactivated, allowing the driver to select a range and limiting thehighest gear available. Gradebraking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode



While using the ERS, cruise control

and the Tow/Haul mode can beused. See Tow/Haul Mode following.

driving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic Transmission on page 9‑ 22 .


Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive

Vehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all four wheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire

on an AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restore AWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire on page 10 ‑ 73 for more information.

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS)

This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system thathelps prevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If driving safely on a wet road and it

becomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure

to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change



If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 5 ‑ 21.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle


suddenly slows or stops. Always

leave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and let ABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this is

normal.Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on

Notice: Driving with the parking

brake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, then

push down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.



system warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 ‑ 20 .

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9‑ 43 .


Brake Assist

This vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system under conditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation or pedal movement during this time is

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the driver completely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driver releases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling. Thebrakes will automatically releasewhen the accelerator pedal is

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak ® System

The vehicle has the StabiliTraksystem which combines antilockbrake, traction, and stability controlsystems and helps the driver maintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start the vehicle andbegin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before the



normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

applied within the two‐second

window. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).In some cases, it may takeapproximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of driving before the system initializes.


If the system fails to turn on or

activate, one of the followingmessages will be displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC):SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,SERVICE STABILITRAK, theStabiliTrak light will come on andstay and four chimes are heard.If these conditions are observed,turn the vehicle off, wait

15 seconds, and then turn it backon again to reset the system. If anyof these messages still appear onthe Driver Information Center (DIC),the vehicle should be taken in for service. For more information on theDIC messages, see Ride Control System Messages on page 5 ‑ 36 .

The system may be heard or felt

while it is working; this is normal.

The traction control button is located

on the instrument panel.The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and releasing the tractioncontrol button.

Traction control can be turned on bypressing and releasing the tractioncontrol button and the appropriateTRACTION CONTROL ON

brake-traction control when traction

control is off, but will not be able touse the engine speed managementsystem. See “Traction ControlOperation” following for moreinformation.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay be heard and felt as a result of the brake-traction control working.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-road



The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

message will be displayed, if notautomatically shut off for any other reason.

When the traction control systemis turned off, the appropriateTRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage will be displayed on theDIC. The vehicle will still have

conditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑ 9.


Traction Control Operation

The traction control system is partof the StabiliTrak system. Tractioncontrol limits wheel spin by reducingengine power to the wheels (enginespeed management) and byapplying the brakes as necessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when the

vehicle is started. It will activate andthe StabiliTrak light will flash if itsenses that any of the wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction while driving. If tractioncontrol is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portion of traction control will work. Theengine speed management will bedisabled. In this mode, engine

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle

is allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak ® , ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spin thewheel(s) excessively while these

lights and messages aredisplayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, areduction in acceleration may benoticed or a noise or vibration may

If cruise control is being used when

the system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑ 31.

StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.

If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, see your dealer for service.



power is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause thebrake-traction control to activateconstantly.

noticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.


Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control is disengaged.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

T (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicator comes on when cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. Press theI button to turn the

cruise control system on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press and release the



on slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET – : Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or to makethe vehicle decelerate.

SET – button located on thesteering wheel.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.


Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, press the +RESbutton on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previously setspeed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold the +RES buttonon the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, then

Reducing Speed While Using

Cruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold the SET – buttonon the steering wheel until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,

press the SET –

button briefly.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed. When youtake your foot off the pedal, the

you might have to step on the

accelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlis disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ button.

. To turn off the cruise control,

pressT on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory



release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press the+RES button briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

vehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,

The cruise control set speedis erased from memory by

pressing T or if the ignition is

turned off.


Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking Assist

If available, the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) systemassists the driver with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates at

speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect objects up to2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, andat least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The URPA system does not

WARNING (Continued)

or vehicle damage, even withURPA, always check behind thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as the

To be detected, objects must be at

least 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below liftgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

Turning the System On and Off

The system can be disabled through

the Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5 ‑ 40 for more information.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly



detect pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. To prevent injury, death,

(Continued)

vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.


PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE

OWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:

. The ultrasonic sensors are notclean. Keep the vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10 ‑ 83 .

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost or ice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur after washing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

. The bumper is damaged. Take

the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Rear Vision

Camera (RVC)The vehicle may have a rear visioncamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaypedestrians, bicyclists, animals,

WARNING (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle usingonly the RVC screen or by usingthe screen during longer, higher speed backing maneuvers,or where there could becross-traffic. Perceived distancesmay be different from actualdistances.

Failure to use proper care beforebacking may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. Alwayscheck before backing by checkingbehind and around the vehicle.

Vehicles without NavigationSystem



. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, URPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

or any other object locatedoutside the cameras field of view,below the bumper, or under thevehicle.

(Continued)

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in the ON/RUN positionand the driver shifts the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on the inside


rear view mirror. Once the driver

shifts out of R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically disappearsfrom the inside rear view mirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camera

system, press and holdz, located

on the inside rearview mirror, until

the left indicator light turns off. Therear vision camera display is nowdisabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press and

holdz until the left indicator light

illuminates. The rear vision camerasystem display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirror

the driver shifts the vehicle into

R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on thenavigation screen. Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,after a delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure menu options, thenpress the MENU hard key toselect Display or touch theDisplay screen button.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen button ishighlighted the RVC systemis on.

The delay received after shifting outof R (Reverse) is approximately10 seconds. The delay can be



normally.

Vehicles with NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

canceled by performing one of thefollowing:

. Pressing a hard key on thenavigation system.

. Shifting into P (Park).

. Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).


There is a message on the rear

vision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety.”

Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theMENU button while the rear visioncamera image is on the display. Anyadjustments made will only affectthe rear vision camera screen.

] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the brightnessof the screen.

_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrast of

th

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled and thesymbols have been turned on, the

Rear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑ 33 .

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

T t th b l ff

3. Press the MENU hard key to

enter the configure menuoptions, then press the MENUhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

Rear Vision Camera Error Messages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from other

hi l t



the screen. To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

vehicle systems.If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.


Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located in the rear liftgate handle.

The area displayed by the camera islimited and does not display objectsthat are close to either corner or under the bumper. The areadisplayed can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screendiffers from the actual distance.

When the System Does Not

Seem To Work ProperlyThe rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or displaya clear image if:

. The RVC is turned off. See“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off ” earlier inthis section.

.

It is dark.. The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.



The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at your dealer.


. There are extreme temperature

changes.The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs the leftindicator light on the mirror willflash.

. A slow flash may indicate a loss

of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate that thedisplay has been on for themaximum allowable time duringa reverse cycle, or the displayhas reached an Over Temperature limit.

The fast flash conditions are

used to protect the videodevice from high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal the device willreset and the green indicator willstop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash as

long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)or until the conditions return tonormal.

Pressing and holdingz when the

left indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along with theleft indicator light.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.




Recommended Fuel

Use regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs use a gasoline rated

Gasoline Specifications

(U.S. and Canada Only) At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/ CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑ 40 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirements

If the vehicle is certified to meet

California Emissions Standards it is

control system performance might

be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 ‑ 17 . If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountries

Never use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehicle

warranty



If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

California Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission

warranty.To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.


Fuel Additives

To provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines contain

only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for the

TOP TIER label on the fuel pump toli t h d

For customers who do not use TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than

15% ethanol must not be used in

Notice: This vehicle was not

designed for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are

not reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emission

control system performance The



TOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed for those fuels.

control system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.


Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine when

refueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle while

pumping fuel Keep children away

To open the fuel door, push the

rearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right

{ WARNINGFuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and wait

for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10 83



pumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

to the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

Exterior Care on page 10 ‑ 83 .


When replacing the fuel cap, turn

it clockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5 ‑ 17 .

{WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded be sure to get the right

tank and emissions system. See

Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5 ‑ 17 .

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel container

while it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while

WARNING (Continued). Bring the fill nozzle in contact

with the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fuel

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)


Towing

General TowingInformation

Only use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:

. For information on driving whiletowing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailer weights, see “Trailer Towing.”

.

For information on equipment to

vehicle such as a motor home, see

Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10 ‑ 79.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control when

pulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell — or even at all. The driver and passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resulting

repairs would not be covered by

The vehicle can tow a trailer when

equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing on page 9‑ 47 . Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Withthe added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer also

adds wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the proper trailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of your passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.



For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on page 10 ‑ 79. For information ontowing the vehicle behind another

repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.


Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:

. There are many laws, includingspeed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements.

. Consider using sway control.See Towing Equipment on page 9‑ 49.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle, or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make starts

at full throttle. This reduces wear

. Obey speed limit restrictions

when towing a trailer.. The vehicle is designed primarily

as a passenger and loadcarrying vehicle. If a trailer istowed, the vehicle will requiremore frequent maintenance dueto the additional load.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailer weight. The vehicle is now longer and not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle

During the trip, check regularly to be

sure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavyload. The purpose of the Tow/Haulmode is to:

. Reduce the frequency and



at full throttle. This reduces wear on the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.See “Tow/Haul Mode” later inthis section.

has electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

Reduce the frequency andimprove the predictability of transmission shifts.

. Provide the same solid shift feelas when the vehicle is unloaded.


. Improve control of vehicle speed

while requiring less throttle pedalactivity.

. Increase the charging systemvoltage to assist in recharging abattery installed in a trailer.

Press this button located on theconsole to turn on and turn off theTow/Haul mode. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑ 25 .

The Tow/Haul light on theinstrument panel comes on to

indicate that Tow/Haul mode hasbeen selected

Tow/Haul is designed to be most

effective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See Trailer Towing on page 9‑ 47 .Tow/Haul is most useful whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load under the followingdriving conditions:

.

Traveling through rolling terrain.. Traveling in stop and go traffic.

. Traveling in busy parking lotswhere improved low speedcontrol of the vehicle is desired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailer will not cause damage but there isno benefit. Such a selection whenunloaded may result in unpleasant

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is needed

when towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.



d cate t at o / au ode asbeen selected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off bypressing the button again, at whichtime the indicator light on theinstrument panel will turn off. Thevehicle will automatically turn off Tow/Haul every time it is started.

unloaded may result in unpleasantengine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fueleconomy.

right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.


Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,

curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash whenever

signaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up the trailer

When towing a trailer, the arrows on

the instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a longor steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well. See “ AutomaticEngine Grade Braking” within Tow/ Haul Mode on page 9‑ 25 .

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude on

To avoid this, let the engine run

while parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10 ‑ 17 .

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle speed toaround 88 km/h (55 mph) to reduce

the possibility of the engine and thetransmission overheating.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goes

wrong, the rig could start to move.P l b i j d d b th



g g gProperly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating.

g, gPeople can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.


If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal

while you:

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is

clear of the chocks.4. Stop and have someone pick up

and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule on

page 11‑ 3 . Things that are

especially important in trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer

Trailer Towing

Three important considerationshave to do with weight:

. The weight of the trailer

. The weight of the trailer tongue

. The total weight on the vehicle'stires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in the



y1.1. Start the engine.

1.2. Shift into a gear.

1.3. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

g gTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating on page 10 ‑ 17 .

gassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.


Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

Front‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg)

All‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)

All‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be

exceeded.

Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 4 or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 5 for more

information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any

If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,

the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle will



g ycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.

the GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 .


If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10‐15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,

separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustments

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or

the RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue

Weight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see Vehicle

Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 for more

i f ti D t th

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by, and rough roadsare a few reasons why the righthitch is needed.

. The rear bumper on the vehicleis not intended for hitches. Do

not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,then be sure to seal the holeswhen the hitch is removed. If the

holes are not sealed, dirt, water,and deadly carbon monoxide



p ope ey a e o , adjus e smight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR

information. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

and deadly carbon monoxide(CO) from the exhaust may getinto the vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 9‑ 21.


Weight-Distributing Hitches and

Weight Carrying Hitches

A. Body-to-Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted so

that the distance (A) remains thesame both before and after coupling

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilock

Trailer Wiring Harness

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with aseven-pin connector, is located atthe rear of the vehicle and is tied tothe vehicle's frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

. Dark Green: Right Stop/TurnSignal

. Brown: Taillamps

. Black: Ground

. Light Green: Back-up Lamps



same both before and after couplingthe trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the

vehicle's hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

. Red/Black: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*


*The fuse for this circuit is installed

in the underhood electrical center,but the wires are not connected.They should be connected by your dealer or a qualified service center.

If the back-up lamp circuit is notfunctional, contact your dealer.

If a remote (non-vehicle) battery isbeing charged, press the Tow/Haulmode switch located on the center

console near the climate controls.This will boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge thebattery. If the trailer is too light for Tow/Haul mode, turn on theheadlamps (non‐HID only) as asecond way to boost the vehiclesystem and charge the battery.

Electric Trailer Brake Control

Wiring ProvisionsThese wiring provisions for anelectric trailer brake controller areincluded with the vehicle as partof the trailer wiring package. Theinstrument panel contains blunt cutwires behind the steering column for the electric trailer brake controller.The harness contains the followingwires:

. Red/Black: Power Supply

. White: Brake Switch Signal

. Gray: Illumination

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal

. Black: Ground

The electric trailer brake controller

should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center.

Conversions and

Add-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

Notice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can

damage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.B f i dd hi



Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3 ‑ 36 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3 ‑ 36 .


2 NOTES



Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information .......... 10-2California Proposition

65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-3California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Accessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your Own

Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine Compartment

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-6En g in e Co v e r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 -7Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-8

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Automatic TransmissionFl id 10 11

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11

Cooling System .. . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-17Overheated Engine

ProtectionOperating Mode ........... 10-19

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-19Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-22

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24 Automatic Transmission Shift

Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Wiper BladeReplacement 10 25

Headlamp Aiming

Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Bulb Replacement

Bulb Replacement .. . . . . . . . . 10-26Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-28Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devices and

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Electrical System

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Fuses and Circuit

Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Engine Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Instrument Panel Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33



Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Replacement .............. 10-25

10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-37Tire Designations .. . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tire Terminology and

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-39Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-42Tire Pressure Monitor

S y s t e m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 - 4 3Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48When It Is Time for New

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-49Buying New Tires .. . . . . . . . . . 10-50Different Size Tires and

W h e e l s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 - 5 1Uniform Tire Quality

Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Wheel Alignment and Tire

B a l a n c e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 - 5 3

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-53

T ire Ch a in s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 -5 4If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit .. . . . . . . . . . 10-57Storing the Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit .. . . . . . . . . . 10-64Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-73

Jump Starting

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Towing

Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-79Recreational Vehicle

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-79

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0-88

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:



Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition

65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or

emit these chemicals.

California Perchlorate

Materials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, see

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.

Accessories and

Modifications Adding non‐dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilock

brakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories or modifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.



10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3 ‑ 36 .

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehicle

without knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the proper

nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. Metric and Englishfasteners can be easil

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13 ‑ 16 .

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3 ‑ 36 .

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records on page 11‑ 14.



fasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

Vehicle Care 10-5

Hood

To open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood release handle

with this symbol on it. It islocated under the instrumentpanel on the driver's side of thevehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pullup on the center of the hood,and push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

3. After you have partially liftedthe hood, gas struts willautomatically take over to liftand hold the hood in the fullyopen position.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lower the hood until the lifting pressure of the strut is reduced. Then allow thehood to fall and latch into placeunder its own weight. Check tomake sure the hood is closed. If thehood does not fully latch, gentlypush the hood down at the frontand center of the hood until it iscompletely latched.



10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview



Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10 ‑ 13 .

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap.See Cooling System on page 10 ‑ 13 .

C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 10 ‑ 74.

D. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10 ‑ 30 .

E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 10 ‑ 74.

F. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (under engine cover). SeePower Steering Fluid on page 10 ‑ 19.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When

to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 10 ‑ 8 .

H. Engine Cover on page 10 ‑ 7 .

I. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 10 ‑ 8 .

J. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10 ‑ 11.

K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 10 ‑ 21.

L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 10 ‑ 11.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “ Adding Washer Fluid” under Washer Fluid on page 10 ‑ 20 .

Engine Cover

A. Oil Fill Cap

B. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Raise the engine cover (B) torelease it from the retainers.



3. Lift and remove the enginecover.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall engine cover.

10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engineoil. Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Always use engine oil approvedto the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See

“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System on page 10

‑ 10 .

. Always dispose of engine oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 ‑ 6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil level

reading is essential:1. If the engine has been running

recently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, then

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add

1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 12 ‑ 2 .

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmful



. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

shown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatched

Vehicle Care 10-9

area that shows the proper operating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 ‑ 6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 .

Specification

approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil or equivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with your dealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved tothe dexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle Do not use

be used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification or equivalent. See “Specification” for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine

Oil FlushesDo not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could cause

engine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.



Specification

Use and ask for licensed engineoils with the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1

grade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil should

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on

10-10 Vehicle Care

your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never

dispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change the

i il d filt Thi i b d

indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).

It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform this

work and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil drain

since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

If the vehicle does not have Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off. The vehiclemust be in P (Park) to accessthis display. Press the tripodometer reset stem until OILLIFE REMAINING displays.

2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING shows “100% ”



engine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change is

over the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)

REMAINING shows 100%.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

Vehicle Care 10-11


If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes back onwhen the vehicle is started, theengine oil life system has notbeen reset. Repeat theprocedure.

If the vehicle has Driver InformationCenter (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,

with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton until “100%” is displayed.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.


Automatic Transmission

FluidIt is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

Change the fluid at the intervals

listed in Maintenance Schedule on page 11‑ 3 , and be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 .

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered by

the vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidli t d i R d d Fl id

temperature. If you need to checkthe transmission fluid level, pleasetake the vehicle to your dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil change

after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑ 3 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 ‑ 6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter



If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 .

The transmission fluid will not reachthe end of the dipstick unless thetransmission is at operating

Cleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter (away

10-12 Vehicle Care

from vehicle) to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains coveredwith dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter:

1. Remove the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10 ‑ 7 .

A. Ventilation Tube

B Sensor

A. Clamp

B. Screws

C. Housing Cover

D. Filter

E. Base

4. Loosen the outlet duct

clamp (A).5. Loosen the six housing

cover (C) screws (B)

7. Remove the filter (D) and anyloose debris that may be foundin the base (E).

8. Inspect or replace the filter (D).

9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 toreinstall the housing cover andreconnect the electricalconnector to the sensor.

10. Reinstall the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10 ‑ 7 .

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution when

working on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.



B. Sensor

2. Disconnect the cover fitting fromthe ventilation tube (A).

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the sensor (B).

cover (C) screws (B).

6. Remove the housing cover (C)with outlet duct.

Vehicle Care 10-13

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into the

engine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

Cooling System

The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leak

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL ® can cause premature

engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)or 24 months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in the

vehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. The coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and add

l t h it i l If th i



A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View)

fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating on page 10 ‑ 17 .

10-14 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain water and other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.

With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL

coolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), engine

temperature.. Protects against rust and

corrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine could

overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's

cooling system, the vehiclecould be damaged. Use only theproper mixture of the enginecoolant listed in this manualfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 for more information.

Never dispose of engine coolant

by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and your health.



y yToo much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

Vehicle Care 10-15

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not at

or above the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done. See Cooling System on page 10 ‑ 13 for more information.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theFULL COLD line marked on therecovery tank.

When the engine is hot, the levelcould be higher than the FULLCOLD line. If the coolant is belowthe FULL COLD line when theengine is hot, there could be a leakin the cooling system.

If the coolant is low, add the coolant

or take the vehicle to a dealer for service.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the proper

DEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.



10-16 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they cancome out at high speed. Never

WARNING (Continued)

cooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

2. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turnthe pressure cap slowly

counterclockwise about onefull turn.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left in thesystem.

3. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator to the base of the filler neck with the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture.



turn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the

(Continued)

1. Detach the fasteners and lift off the panel that covers theradiator cap.

Vehicle Care 10-17

5. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

6. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

7. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hose

feels warm. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fans.

8. If the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck is low, add

more of the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture through the filler neck until the level is back up tothe base of the filler neck.

9. Replace the pressure cap. Besure to secure it tightly. At anytime during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the

pressure cap.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine Overheating

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on theinstrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gaugeon page 5 ‑ 13 .

The vehicle may also displayan ENGINE OVERHEATED

IDLE ENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINEmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Warning Lights,Gauges, and Indicators on page 5 ‑ 10 .

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.

See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside Assistance Program



Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9.

10-18 Vehicle Care

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked

on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 10 ‑ 19 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the

vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.

Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

WARNING (Continued)

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 10 ‑ 19 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming FromThe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer.



emergency.(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-19

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, shift toN (Neutral), otherwise, shiftto the highest gear while

driving—

D (Drive) or L (Low).If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not come

back on, continue to drive normally.If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes while

parked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”next in this section.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode

This emergency operating mode letsthe vehicle be driven to a safe placein an emergency situation. If anoverheated engine condition exists,an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, there is a significant lossin power and engine performance.The temperature gauge indicates anoverheat condition exists. Drivingextended distances and/or towing a

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protection

operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10 ‑ 8 .

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir is

located under the engine cover onthe passenger side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview

10 6 f i l ti



stop, and park the vehicleright away.

extended distances and/or towing atrailer in the overheat protectionmode should be avoided.

on page 10 ‑ 6 for reservoir location.

10-20 Vehicle Care

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering

FluidTo check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10 ‑ 7 .

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

The fluid level should besomewhere between the MAX and

MIN line on the dipstick in roomtemperature. If the fluid is on or below the MIN line, add fluid closeto the MAX Line.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 . Always

use the proper fluid.Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 .

Washer FluidWhat to Use

may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against

freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Washer Fluid Messages on page 5 ‑ 40 for more

information.

Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10 6 for reservoir location



5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

When adding windshield washer fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operatingin an area where the temperature

page 10 ‑ 6 for reservoir location.

Vehicle Care 10-21

Notice

.

When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher It can damage the

Brakes

This vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when the

brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torque

specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 12 ‑ 2 .

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase in

pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.



washer. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

in costly brake repair.Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

10-22 Vehicle Care

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes might

not work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. See

Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 ‑ 6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir might go down:

. The brake fluid level goes downbecause of normal brake lining

wear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

A fl id l k i th b k

hydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or later

the brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is

done on the brake hydraulicsystem.



. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 ‑ 20 .

Vehicle Care 10-23

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 .

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid can

badly damage brake

hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulic

system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on the

vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.

Battery

Refer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain lead

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting on page 10 ‑ 74 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.



hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brake

and lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

10-24 Vehicle Care

All-Wheel Drive

It is not necessary to check theall –wheel drive lubricant levels. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take thevehicle to the dealer as soon aspossible.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNINGWhen you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, be

sure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking

Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off

the engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough room

around the vehicle. It shouldbe parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 9‑ 27 .

Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.



brake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake on page 9‑ 27 .

Vehicle Care 10-25

Ignition Transmission

Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

. The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injured

WARNING (Continued)

Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keeping

your foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade Replacement

Windshield wiper blades shouldbe inspected for wear or cracking.See Maintenance Schedule on page 11‑ 3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed in

different ways. To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armaway from the windshield.

2. Press the button in the middle of th i t d ll



You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.

(Continued)

g gto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

the wiper arm connector and pullthe wiper blade away from thearm connector.

10-26 Vehicle Care

3. Install the new wiper blade andmake sure the wiper blade locks

into place.For the proper size and type seeMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 11‑ 13 .

Backglass Wiper Blade

To replace the backglass wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.

The backglass wiper blade willnot lock in a vertical position socare should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Rotate the wiper bladeassembly, hold the wiper arm inposition, and push the blade

away from the wiper arm.3. Replace the wiper blade.

4. Return the wiper arm and blade

Headlamp Aiming

Headlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you

(for vertical aim).If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatyou take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

Bulb Replacement

For the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 10 ‑ 28 .

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andStoplamps



passembly to the rest position onthe glass.

A. Sidemarker Lamp

B. Taillamp

Vehicle Care 10-27

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2

‑ 10 .

2. Remove the convenience net,if the vehicle has one.

3. Remove the two taillamp nutcovers.

4. Remove the two nuts holding thetaillamp assembly in place.

5. Pull out the taillamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out to remove it from thetaillamp assembly.

7. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.

8. Push the new bulb straight intothe bulb socket until it connects.

9. Push the taillamp assembly backinto its original location.

When reinstalling the taillampassembly, make sure the pin onthe taillamp assembly lines upand is inserted correctly into the

opening of the vehicle.10. Reinstall the two nuts that hold

the taillamp assembly in place.

11. Reinstall the two taillamp nutcovers.



10-28 Vehicle Care

License Plate Lamp

A. License Plate Lamp HousingB. Bulb

C. Bulb Socket

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Using a small flat-bladed tool,insert the blade end at the backedge of the rear license platelamp housing (A).

2. Gently push forward while liftingthe back edge of the lamphousing from the bumper opening

3. Turn the bulb socket (C)one‐quarter turn to release the

bulb socket from the lamphousing (A).

4. Pull the bulb (B) from the bulbsocket (C).

5. Reverse the steps to install.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number License Plate Lamp 194LL

Rear Sidemarker Lamp

194LL

Rear Turn Signaland Taillamps

7443(W21/5W)

For replacement bulbs not listed

here, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ WARNING

Exposure to high voltage cancause shock, burns, and evendeath. The high voltage

components in the vehicle canonly be serviced by technicianswith special training.

High voltage components areidentified by labels. Do notremove, open, take apart,or modify these components.High voltage cable or wiring hasorange covering. Do not probe,

tamper with, cut, or modify highvoltage cable or wiring.



opening.

Vehicle Care 10-29

Electrical SystemOverload

The vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. This

greatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may cause

the lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off or remain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.



10-30 Vehicle Care

Fuses and CircuitBreakers

The wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is broken

or melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The underhood fuse block is locatedin the engine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/ relay block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on the

vehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.



Vehicle Care 10-31

Fuses Usage

A/C CLTCH Air ConditioningClutch

ABS MTR Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)Motor

AFSAdaptive ForwardLighting System

AIRBAG Airbag System

AUX POWER Auxiliary Power

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

AWDAll-Wheel-DriveSystem

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 2 Battery 2

BATT 3 Battery 3

CIGARLIGHTER

Cigarette Lighter



The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

ECMEngine ControlModule

10-32 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

ECM 1 Engine ControlModule 1

EMISSION 1 Emission 1

EMISSION 2 Emission 2

EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

FSCMFuel SystemControl Module

HORN Horn

HTD MIRHeated OutsideRearview Mirror

HUMIDITY/ MAF

Humidity Sensor/ MAF Sensor

HVAC BLWR

Heating, Ventilationand Air Conditioning

Fuses Usage

LT HI BEAM Left High-BeamHeadlamp

LT LO BEAMLeft Low‐BeamHeadlamp

LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal

ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils

PCM IGNPowertrain ControlModule Ignition

PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate

PWROUTLET

Power Outlet

REAR

CAMERA

Rear Vision

Camera

RR APORear AccessoryPower Outlet

RR DEFOG R D f

Fuses Usage

RR HVAC Rear ClimateControl System

RT HI BEAMRight High‐BeamHeadlamp

RT LO BEAMRight Low‐BeamHeadlamp

RT PRKRightParking Lamp

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal

RVC SNSRRegulated VoltageControl Sensor

S/ROOF/ SUNSHADE

Sunroof

SERVICE Service Repair

SPARE Spare

STOPLAMPS

Stoplamps(Chi O l )



gBlower

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger LAMPS

(China Only)(China Only)

STRTR Starter

Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage

TCM TransmissionControl Module

TRANS Transmission

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back‐upLamps

TRLR BRK Trailer Brake

TRLRPRK LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps

TRLR PWR Trailer Power

WPR/WSWWindshield Wiper/ Washer

Relays Usage

A/CCMPRSR

CLTCH

Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

CRNK Switched Power

Relays Usage

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HI BEAMHigh‐BeamHeadlamps

HID/ LO BEAM

High IntensityDischarge (HID)Low‐Beam

Headlamps

HORN Horn

IGN Ignition Main

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

PRK LAMP Parking Lamp

PWR/TRN Powertrain

RR DEFOGRear WindowDefogger

Relays Usage

Stop Lamps(China Only) Stop Lamps(China Only)

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back-upLamps

WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HIWindshield Wiper High Speed

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated under the instrument panelon the passenger side of thevehicle. Pull down on the cover toaccess the fuse block.



CRNK Switched Power

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

10-34 Vehicle Care

Fuse Side

Fuses Usage

AIRBAG Airbag AMP Amplifier

BCK/ UP/STOP

Back‐up Lamp/ Stoplamp

BCMBody ControlModule

CNSTR/ VENT

Canister Vent

CTSY Courtesy Lamps

DR/LCK Door Locks

DRLDaytime RunningLamps

DRL 2/ RR Fog

GMC HID Only(If Equipped)/ Rear FogLamps-China Only

DSPLY Display

FRT/WSWFront WindshieldWasher

Fuses Usage

HVAC Heating, Ventilationand Air Conditioning

INADV/ PWR/LED

InadvertentPower LED

INFOTMNT Infotainment

LT/TRN/SIGDriver Side TurnSignal

MSM Memory SeatModule

PDMPower Mirrors,Liftgate Release

PWR MODE Power Mode

PWR/MIR Power Mirrors

RDO Radio

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

RT/TRN/SIGPassenger SideTurn Signal



The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Washer

HTD/ COOL SEAT

Heated/CoolingSeats

SPARE Spare

STR/WHL/ ILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination

Vehicle Care 10-35

Relay Side

Relays Usage

LT/ PWR/SEAT Driver Side Power Seat Relay

RT/ PWR/SEAT

Passenger SidePower Seat Relay

PWR/WNDWPower WindowsRelay

PWR/ COLUMN

Power SteeringColumn Relay

L/GATE Liftgate Relay

LCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSWRear WindowWasher Relay

UNLCKPower UnlockRelay

Relays Usage

DRL2 Daytime RunningLamps 2 Relay(If Equipped)

LT/UNLCKDriver Side UnlockRelay

DRLDaytime RunningLamps Relay(If Equipped)

SPARE Spare

FRT/WSWFront WindshieldWasher Relay



10-36 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual for information regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additional

information refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires can

cause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See Vehicle

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mount

the tires.. Do not spin the tires in

excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.



Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 .

(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-37

Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in this

section for more detail.(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.

GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number

Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the

manufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in

the sidewall and under the tread.(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 10

‑ 52 .

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load



particular tire s width, height,aspect ratio, construction type, (TIN): The letters and numbers

following the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are the

that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

10-38 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life of

approximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact spare

tire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air and

gone flat. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on

page 10 ‑ 73 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10 ‑ 55 .

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Department

of Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compact

spare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure on

page 10 ‑ 42 .

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,

construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet



maximum pressure neededto support that load.

GM s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Vehicle Care 10-39

Tire Designations

Tire SizeThe following is an exampleof a typical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:

The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire section

idth i illi t f

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tire

height‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicate

the type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of theti Th l d i d t

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed a

tire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure is

expressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories areautomatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power

windows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.



width in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

tire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire

g

10-40 Vehicle Care

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between

the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire

in which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10 ‑ 42 .

Curb Weight: The weight of a

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but without

passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT code

includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑ 10 .

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits on

9 10

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. See

Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 .

Intended Outboard Sidewall:

The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:

The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure is



g gmotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the

page 9‑ 10 . The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Vehicle Care 10-41

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The

number of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑ 10 .

Occupant Distribution:

Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire that

has a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears

model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the same

moldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehicle

manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10 ‑ 42 andVehicle Load Limits on

page 9‑ 10 .

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords that

extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. See

When It Is Time for New Tireson page 10 ‑ 49.



white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or

and upon which the tire beadsare seated.

10-42 Vehicle Care

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tire

information system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See Uniform

Tire Quality Grading on page 10 ‑ 52 .

Vehicle Capacity Weight:

The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 .

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to a

vehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑ 10 .

Tire Pressure

Tires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation nor overinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout

. Premature or irregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tiresthat have too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on thevehicle indicates the originalequipment tires and the correctcold tire inflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity



g , p g ,cargo weight.

lead to a blowout. load carrying capacity.

Vehicle Care 10-43

For additional informationregarding how much weight the

vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑ 10 . Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month or more. Do not forget the compactspare tire, if the vehicle has one.The compact spare should be at420 kPa (60 psi). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on

page 10 ‑ 73 .

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type

gauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.

If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, press

Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensor

technology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or



p g pon the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air.

indicated on the vehicle placard or

10-44 Vehicle Care

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantlyunder ‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under ‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under ‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Al h k th TPMS lf ti

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10 ‑ 44 for additional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 ‑ 20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure Monitor

OperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressure



,responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under ‐inflation has

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to

driver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheel

Vehicle Care 10-45

assembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly, if the vehicle

has one. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in the tiresand transmits the tire pressurereadings to a receiver locatedin the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommended

pressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 .

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the Driver

DIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires

are inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 ‑ 24 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5 ‑ 29 and Tire Messages on

page 5 ‑ 38 .

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold See Vehicle Load

of the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see Tire

Pressure on page 10 ‑

42 .The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10 ‑ 47 , Tire Rotation on page 10 ‑ 48 and Tires on page 10 ‑ 36 .

Notice: Tire sealant materials are

not all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use onlythe GM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer or included in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMS



a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and the

they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 , for an example

gsensors. See Tire Sealant and

10-46 Vehicle Care

Compressor Kit on page 10 ‑ 57 for information regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays

on for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:

. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire is

successfully. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully after rotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off after successfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommended

could prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See Buying New Tires on page 10 ‑ 50 .

. Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealer

for service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor matching process should also beperformed after replacing a spareti ith d ti t i i th



go off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensor matching process is performed

tire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go off

Vehicle Care 10-47

at the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/ wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See your dealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter's LOCKand UNLOCK buttons at thesame time for approximatelyfi d Th h d

is in relearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor. A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code has

been matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensor identification code has been

t h d t th d i id

matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire Inspection

We recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber



five seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver

matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor

rubber.

10-48 Vehicle Care

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snagged

deep enough to show cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because of the size or location of the

damage.

Tire Rotation

Tires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule on

page 11‑ 3 .

Tires are rotated to achieve a

uniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed rotate the tires as soon

alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See

When It Is Time for New Tireson page 10 ‑ 49 and Wheel Replacement on page 10 ‑ 53 .

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires

Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated.

See Tire Pressure on page 10 ‑ 42 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑ 10 .

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on

page 10 ‑ 44.

Check that all wheel nuts are

properly tightened. See“Wheel

Nut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications on

page 12 ‑ 2 .

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, can

make wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the



noticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheel

jto the recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and

p

(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-49

WARNING (Continued)

wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Check that the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedproperly. Push, pull, and then try

to rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. SeeTire Changing on page 10 ‑ 65 .

When It Is Time for New Tires

Factors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way to

tell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10 ‑ 47 and Tire

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more information

on when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deterioraterubber.



p p gRotation on page 10 ‑ 48 for moreinformation.

10-50 Vehicle Care

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New Tires

GM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. The

original equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification (TPCSpec) system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the sameTPC Spec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of the

traction control, and tirepressure monitoring

performance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 10 ‑ 37 for additional information.

GM recommends replacing allthe tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are not

replaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10 ‑ 47 and Tire Rotation on page 10 ‑ 48 for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.



vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,

Vehicle Care 10-51

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.

A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed.S Ti P M it

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates the

original equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑ 10 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheels

If wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, traction

control, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, and

have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 10 ‑ 50 and Accessories and Modifications on page 10 ‑ 3 for additional information.



See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 10 ‑ 43 .

10-52 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGrading

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The grades

are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snow

tires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal Safety

Requirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a

comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.



Vehicle Care 10-53

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from

highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under controlled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its

bilit t di i t h t h

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance

The tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular basis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling to

one side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or

corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can be

i d S d l if f



ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

10-54 Vehicle Care

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 ‑ 55 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use a

new GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the

tire chains could cause loss of control and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturer recommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination androad conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slow

and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.



Vehicle Care 10-55

If a Tire Goes Flat

It is unusual for a tire to blow out,

especially if the tires are maintainedproperly. See Tires on page 10 ‑ 36 .If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But if there is ever a blowout, here are afew tips about what to expect andwhat to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicle

toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction as

used in a skid. Stop pressing the

accelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently

brake to a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severely

underinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipmentand training. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, it is designedonly for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or

killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with thevehicle, only use it for changing aflat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage bydriving slowly to a level place,well off the road, if possible.



10-56 Vehicle Care

Turn on the hazard warningflashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 ‑ 4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from

moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicle

is raised.(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

This vehicle may come with a jack

and spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing on page 10 ‑ 65 . To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit on page 10 ‑ 57 .

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placement

of wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire



Vehicle Care 10-57

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑ 21.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or

collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealantand compressor kit, there may notbe a spare tire and tire changing

equipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tire.

The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.



10-58 Vehicle Care

The kit includes: A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Air Only)

B. On/Off ButtonC. Pressure Gauge

D. Pressure Deflation Button(If equipped)

E. Tire Sealant Canister

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Air Only Hose (Black)

H. Power PlugTire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister.The sealant canister should be

replaced before its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister ” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See

“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister ” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.



Vehicle Care 10-59

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures warm the kit in a

heated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 ‑ 4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 ‑ 55 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit on page 10 ‑ 64.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5 ‑ 8 .

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle

must be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to theSealant + Air position.



temperatures, warm the kit in a

10-60 Vehicle Care

9. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (C) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10

‑ 42 .

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off

reading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet and

unscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See Roadside Assistance Program (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9 .

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;

therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)

counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power plug (H) back in their originallocation.



pto get an accurate pressure

Vehicle Care 10-61

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (E) and placeit in a highly visible location. Do

not exceed the speed on thislabel until the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under

“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is too

severely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside Assistance Program (Mexico)on page 13 ‑ 9.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa

(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant and

compressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealer within a 161 km (100 mi) of driving to have the tire repairedor replaced.



10-62 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazard

warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 ‑ 4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 ‑ 55 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit on page 10

‑ 64.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.



g

Vehicle Care 10-63

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items from

other accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5 ‑ 8 .

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plug

cord in the door or window.7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle

must be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (B) button to

turn the compressor on.The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressure

gauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10 ‑ 42 .

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off

to get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/ off until the correct pressure isreached.

If you inflate the tire higher than the recommendedpressure you can adjust theexcess pressure by pressingthe pressure deflation

button (D), if equipped, until theproper pressure reading isreached. This option is onlyfunctional when using the air only hose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only

hose (G) from the tirevalve stem by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in their originallocations.

15. Place the equipment in the

original storage location in thevehicle.



10-64 Vehicle Care

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit

The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the storagecompartment on the driver side, atthe rear of the vehicle.

1. Press down on the latch tab andpull the cover off to access thestorage compartment.

2. Press the two tabs on the quickrelease buckle to release the tiresealant and compressor kitstrap.



Vehicle Care 10-65

3. Remove the sealant andcompressor kit from its tray.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing Tools

The tools needed to remove thespare tire are located in the storagecompartment on the driver side, atthe rear of the vehicle.

1. Open the jack storagecompartment by pulling on thelatch tab, located toward the rear of the vehicle, and pulling thecover off.

A. Tool BagB. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) byturning it counterclockwise.

3. Push the jack (C) up out of theholding bracket and remove thetool bag (A).

4. Turn the jack on its side, with thebottom facing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottomfirst.

A. JackB. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,

One-Piece Similar)

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A) and wrench (B).



10-66 Vehicle Care

Removing the Spare Tire

The compact spare tire is located

under the vehicle, in front of the rear bumper. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10 ‑ 73 for more information.

A. Rear Convenience Center

B. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,One-Piece Similar)

C. Carpet Cutout

D. Hoist Shaft

E. Compact Spare Tire

F. Retainer

1. Open the storage compartmentdoor of the conveniencecenter (A) that is nearest the

liftgate.

2. Open the carpet cutout (C) thatis located through the hole of thestorage compartment.

3. Attach the wrench (B) into thehoist shaft (D).

4. Turn the wrench (B)counterclockwise to lower the

spare tire (E) to the ground.Continue turning the wrench untilthe spare tire can be pulled outfrom under the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel opening toremove the spare tire from thecable.

6. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the cable back up after removing the spare tire.

Do not store a full‐size or a flatroad tire under the vehicle. See“Storing the Spare Tire” and“Storing the Flat Tire” later in thissection.



Vehicle Care 10-67

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10 ‑ 55 for moreinformation.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,loosen the plastic nut caps withthe wheel wrench. They will notcome off. Then, using the flatend of the wheel wrench, pryalong the edge of the cover untilit comes off. Be careful; theedges may be sharp. Do not tryto remove the cover with your bare hands.

Store the wheel cover securelyin the rear of the vehicle untilyou have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

If the vehicle has aluminumwheels, remove the wheel nutcaps using the wheel wrench.

3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but donot remove them — using thewrench. For wheels with a wheellock key, use the wheel lock keybetween the lock nut andwrench. The key is supplied inthe front passenger door pocket.

Notice: If this vehicle has wheellocks and an impact wrench isused to remove the wheel nuts,

the lock nut or wheel lock keycould be damaged. Do not use animpact wrench to remove thewheel nuts if this vehicle haswheel locks.

4. To identify the appropriate jacking location, find thetriangle (A) about 30.5 cm (12 in)from the front tire or (B) about27 cm (10.5 in) from therear tire.



10-68 Vehicle Care

The triangle is located near eachwheel on the vehicle's exterior.

Notice: If a jack is used to raisethe vehicle without positioning itcorrectly, the vehicle could bedamaged. When raising thevehicle on a jack, avoid contactwith the rear axle control arms.

5. Attach the wrench to the jack,and turn the wrench clockwise toraise the jack head 7.6 cm (3 in).

6. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Putthe compact spare tire near you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning thewrench clockwise in the jack.Raise the vehicle far enough off

the ground so that there isenough room for the spare tire tofit under the wheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.

9. Remove the plastic spare tireheat shield by pulling the rubber latch. Store the plastic spare tire

heat shield. See “Storing theSpare Tire” later in this sectionfor more information.



Vehicle Care 10-69

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on the

wheel mounting surface.

12. Put the nuts on by hand byturning them clockwise until thewheel is held against themounting surface. Make surethe rounded end is toward thewheel.

13. Lower the vehicle by attachingthe wrench to the jackand turning the wrench

counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should

be tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities and Specifications on page 12 ‑ 2 for original equipment wheel nut

torque specifications.



10-70 Vehicle Care

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. To

avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 12 ‑ 2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover on

the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be damaged.

Storing the Spare Tire

{ WARNING

The underbody-mounted sparetire needs to be stored with thevalve stem pointing down. If the

spare tire is stored with the valvestem pointing upwards, thesecondary latch will not workproperly and the spare tire couldloosen and suddenly fall from thevehicle. If this happened whenthe vehicle was being driven, thetire might contact a person or another vehicle, causing injury

and damage to itself. Be sure theunderbody-mounted spare tire isstored with the valve stempointing down.

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire near the rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tireheat shield on the compactspare tire.



Vehicle Care 10-71

3. Slide the cable retainer throughthe center of the wheel and startto raise the compact spare tire.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside of the wheel.

4. When the compact spare tire isalmost in the stored position,turn the tire so the valve istoward the rear of the vehicle.

This position helps when

checking the air pressure in thecompact spare tire.

5. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle.Continue turning the wrench untilyou feel more than two clicks.This indicates that the compactspare tire is secure and thecable is tight. The spare tire

hoist cannot be overtightened.

6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wrench totighten the cable.

Storing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the cable package fromthe jack storage area.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stempointing toward the rear of thevehicle.



10-72 Vehicle Care

A. CableB. Liftgate Hinges

C. Spare Tire Heat Shield

D. Center of the Wheel

E. Door Striker

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (E), the center of thewheel (D), and the plastic spare

tire heat shield (C), as shown.

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other side of the vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Push thetube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.



Vehicle Care 10-73

Storing the Tools

A. Tool Bag

B. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

Put back all tools as they werestored in the jack storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

1. Ensure that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you.

2. Replace the tool bag (A).

3. Turn the jack (C) on its side andplace down on the holdingbracket.

4. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) byturning clockwise.

5. To replace the cover, line up thetab at the front of the cover withthe notch in the cover opening.Push the cover in place andmake sure that the rear clips arein the slots and push the cover closed.

Store the center cap or the plasticbolt‐on wheel covers until a full sizetire is put back on the vehicle. Whenyou replace the compact spare witha full‐size tire, reinstall the bolt‐onwheel covers or the center cap.Hand‐tighten them over the wheelnuts, using the wrench.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one, was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, however,it can lose air after a time. Checkthe inflation pressure regularly.It should be 420 kPa (60 psi).



10-74 Vehicle Care

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the spare

tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 105 km/h(65 mph) for distances up to5 000 km (3,000 mi), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tire

will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of the

vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare

tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) systemwill be automatically disabled whenyou use the compact spare. Torestore the AWD and preventexcessive wear on the clutch in your AWD, replace the compact spare

tire with a full-size tire as soon aspossible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fitthe compact spare. Using themcan damage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about the

vehicle battery, see Battery on page 10 ‑ 23 .

If the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enough

electricity to burn you.If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.



Vehicle Care 10-75

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not be

covered by the warranty.Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12‐volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are

not touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parking

brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If one of the vehicles is afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is not inNeutral.

Notice: If the radio or other accessories are left on during the jump starting procedure, they

could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessory

power outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it could save the radio!



10-76 Vehicle Care

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the other

vehicle. Your vehicle has aremote positive (+) and aremote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 10 ‑ 6 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not need

to add water to the ACDelco

®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will go

to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage the

battery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.



Vehicle Care 10-77

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery.

Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the

good battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but not near engine parts that move.

The electrical connection is just

as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.



10-78 Vehicle Care

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it

probably needs service.Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct

order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other or other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine

Part or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black

negative (−

) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.



Vehicle Care 10-79

Towing

Towing the Vehicle

Notice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be takenwith vehicles that have low ground clearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9.

To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes,

such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowing

Recreational vehicle towingmeans towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing istowing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Dolly towingis towing the vehicle with two

wheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known as adolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. What is the towing capacityof the towing vehicle? Besure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.



10-80 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

If the vehicle is front-wheel‐drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles may also be towedby putting the front wheels on adolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in thissection.

If the vehicle is all‐wheel‐drive, it

can be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of theground. These vehicles cannot betowed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at each

RV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication of transmission components. Reinstallthe fuse to start the vehicle.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to betowed, shift the transmission toP (Park), and turn the ignition to

LOCK/OFF.2. Secure the vehicle to the towing

vehicle.


4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ ACCESSORY.

5. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the 15 amp

ECM fuse and the 50 ampBATT1 fuse from the underhoodfuse block and store in asafe location. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 10 ‑ 30 .

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each of the

steps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.

Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)while towing the vehicle.



Vehicle Care 10-81

Once the destination is reached:


2. Reinstall the fuses in theunderhood fuse block.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park), turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

4. Disconnect the vehicle from thetowing vehicle.

Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with

the front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tires isa compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on thefront of the vehicle can causesevere damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐DriveVehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles must notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel‐drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheels onthe ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).




10-82 Vehicle Care

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed for

towing.5. Remove the key from the

ignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.



Vehicle Care 10-83

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint, metal,or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriate

disposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washers

exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and water spotting.

Finish Care

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on a

basecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,

bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto or chrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.



10-84 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, a

soft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-free

cloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiper streaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they

are worn or damaged. Damagecan be caused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them last

longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑ 12

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on the

vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim —Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mild

soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then be

applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as ice

and dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water after exposure.



Vehicle Care 10-85

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,

cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, never drive a vehicle with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose, or missing partsor signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper

hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots, andaxle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the

steel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt and

debris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body

repair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining the

vehicle warranty.Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paintsurface.



10-86 Vehicle Care

Interior Care

To prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.

Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mild

soap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products for cleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. To prevent

overspray, apply all cleaners directly

to the cleaning cloth. Cleanersshould be removed quickly. Never allow cleaners to remain on the

surface being cleaned for extendedperiods of time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doorsand windows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiff bristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

.

Do not use laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 dropsper 3.78L (1 gal) of water. A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.



Vehicle Care 10-87

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe droplets

left behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear window

defogger.

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If a

rotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:

. Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or club soda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning cloth

to a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soap

solution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessaryto use a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ring

formation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.



10-88 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber cloth

dampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent

damage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able to

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

provide adequate protection.

Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size or

is not properly installed, it caninterfere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the

pedals.



Vehicle Care 10-89

Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage.

. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

.

Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Button Retainer

Floor mats with a button-typeretainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat tounlock and remove.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining

up the floor mat openings over the carpet retainers andsnapping into position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.

Knob Retainer

Floor mats with a knob retainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Turn the knob until it is alignedwith the slot in the floor matgrommet.

2. Pull up on the floor mat.



10-90 Vehicle Care

3. Center the slot in the floor matgrommet with the knob on thefloor and set into position.

4. Turn the knob until it isperpendicular to the slot in thegrommet to lock the mat inplace.

5. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.



Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule .. . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial Application

S e r v i c e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 - 8

Additional Maintenanceand Care

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule tohelp protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipmentfor fast and accurate diagnostics.Many dealers have extendedevening and Saturday hours,courtesy transportation, and online

scheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can leadto costly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended to

have your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.



11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑ 10 .

.

Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel on page 9‑ 39.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are for vehiclesthat are:

. Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed or competitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer to

have a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10 ‑ 4.




MaintenanceSchedule

Owner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil on page 10 ‑ 8 .

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure on

page 10 ‑

42 .. Inspect the tires for wear. See

Tire Inspection on page 10 ‑ 47 .

. Check the windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid on page 10 ‑ 20 .

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have the

engine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System on page 10 ‑ 10 .

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/ 7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommendedfor the vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10 ‑ 48 .

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10 ‑ 8 and Engine Oil

Life System on page 10 ‑ 10 .

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10 ‑ 13 .

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid on page 10 ‑ 20 .

. Visually inspect windshieldwiper blades for wear, cracking,

or contamination. See Exterior Care on page 10 ‑ 83 . Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacement on page 10 ‑ 25 .




. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure on page 10 ‑ 42 .

.

Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10 ‑ 47 .

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 10 ‑ 11.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,

suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear. See Exterior Care on page 10 ‑ 83 .

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3 ‑ 22 .

. Visually inspect fuel system for

damage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields for loose or damaged parts.

.

Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10 ‑ 83 .

. Check starter switch. See Starter Switch Check on page 10 ‑ 24.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. See Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check on page 10 ‑ 24.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission Lock Check on page 10 ‑ 25 .

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check on page 10 ‑ 25 .

. Check accelerator pedal for damage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

.

Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See your dealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit on page 10 ‑ 57 .

.

Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof on page 2 ‑ 22 .




Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be neededif there is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichever comes first.

d) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced.

e) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System on page 10 ‑ 13 .

f) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying,

excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.




Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Or every two years, whichever comes first.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichever

comes first.

d) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfer

case fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced.

e) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System on page 10 ‑ 13 .

f) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying,

excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices.

Severe Commercial UseVehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/ 3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.




AdditionalMaintenance and Care

Your vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealer technicians know your vehicle best.

Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power tostart the engine and operate any

additional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure

to start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if they squeak or show signsof cracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicianscan inspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

FluidsProper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’ssystems and components. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 for GMapproved fluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should be

checked at every fuel fill.. Instrument cluster lights may

come on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.




Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensure

that there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, your dealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/ sway while braking, longer stopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealer technicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs

of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintaining

the tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge or split in the tire.

.

Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend theright tires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.




Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products are

available from your dealer. For information on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care on page 10 ‑ 86 and Exterior Care on page 10 ‑ 83 .

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical for ensuring that the tires deliver

optimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure proper wheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshield

clean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition to

provide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.




Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10 ‑ 8 .

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10 ‑ 13 .

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON® -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Carrier Assembly — Differential (Rear Drive Module) and Transfer Case

(Power Transfer Unit)

SAE 75W‐90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).




Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)

or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C

Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 20958479 CF179C

Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 —

Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 25920067 —




Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometer

ReadingServiced By Services Performed




DateOdometer Reading

Serviced By Services Performed




DateOdometer

ReadingServiced By Services Performed



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNu mb e r (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 -1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities and

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-2Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification


Number (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can be

seen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This code

identifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”

under Capacities and Specificationson page 12 ‑ 2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification Label

This label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Model designation.

. Paint information.

. Production options and specialequipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.



12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑ 12 for more information.

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant charge

amount, see the refrigerant label located under thehood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qtEngine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal

Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10 ‑ 11 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this

manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.



Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing



12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES



Customer Information 13-1

Customer Information

Customer InformationCustomer Satisfaction

Procedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices( M e x i c o ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 - 5Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program

(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-7Roadside Assistance Program

( M e x i c o ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 - 9Scheduling Service

Appointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Collision Damage Repair

(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14Service Publications

Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to

the United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian

Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Vehicle Data Recording andPr ivacy

Vehicle Data Recording andP r i v a c y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 - 1 9

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-20Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) .. . . . . . 13-20Radio Frequency

Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20


Customer Satisfaction

Procedure (U.S. andCanada)

Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes,

however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.

If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the owner of your dealership or the generalmanager.



13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership without

further help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors of Canada Customer Care Centreat 1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give your

inquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible

through the windshield.. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggest

following Step One first.STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you

can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any

other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800

Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by

vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.




STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the

procedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe our

impartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call

the General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement the

warranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by your dealer sales or service departments.




However, we recognize thatdespite the good intentions of allparties involved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealer service agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or sales

manager, depending on your case.Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or your

dealership owner to ask for their help. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors for support, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by your dealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:

. Name

. Address

. Phone number

. Model year

.

Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN)

. Mileage

. Delivery date

. Description of the problem

. Dealership name

.

Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 4 or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 5 for more

information.

Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)

Chevrolet encourages customersto call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer

Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-1020

1-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872




From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gm.ca1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance Center

Av. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)

To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from

08:00 to 15:00 hours. All e-mail inquiries to the Customer Assistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0811

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0811

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8190

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador 800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101




Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)

To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users in

Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)www.chevyownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenient

place.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.

. Storage for online service andmaintenance records.

. Chevrolet dealer locator for service nationwide.

. Exclusive privileges and offers.

. Recall notices for your specificvehicle.

. OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —

www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do

. FAQ

. Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section of

www.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:

. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone number for each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,

check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to your driveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.ca

section within www.gm.ca.




GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for cost

reimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/ scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text

Telephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call

1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)

For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number.

. Telephone number of your location.

. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/ 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to

make any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.




Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

.

Lock‐

Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the driver must present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to the

nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition and

properly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service to jump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance

.

Impound towing caused byviolation of any laws.

. Legal fines.

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road or highway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles

. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursementis approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America are

provided when requested either with the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.

Additional travel informationis also available. Allowthree weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over

250 kilometers from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy of




the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisor will help to make arrangements

and explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside

Assistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,

after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)

As a new owner, your vehicle is

automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Theservices are available at no costunder the terms and conditionsof the program. The Roadside

Assistance program is not partof, or included, in the coverageprovided by the new vehicle limitedwarranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving thevehicle within your city of residenceor on any passable road in Mexico,the United States, and Canada.Services are subject to thelimitations described in the followingpages. Program coverage varies bycountry.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days of the year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for the vehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicle

ownership.For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0800.

Services Provided

. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, Roadside Assistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedChevrolet dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.




. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service to

jump start a dead battery.. *Emergency Messages:

Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call for emergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Information

regarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Chevroletdealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commission

of a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, Roadside

Assistance will not provideservice. When the vehicle is not

accessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another city

outside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be received

by the nearest Chevrolet dealer due to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time of service. Contact Roadside

Assistance for more informationon authorized amounts.

. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of your vehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestChevrolet dealership to repair the vehicle the same day,requiring the vehicle to stay atthe dealership for a night or more. If this happens, in additionto the previously listed servicesand prior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the following

alternatives, within the limits of existing Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time of service.

Roadside Assistancewill coordinate hotel

accommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.




A rental car will be provided for up to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicles

with a carrying capacity greater than 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: If you prefer to continue your tripto the intended destinationor return to your place of residence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for the

driver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by Roadside

Assistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for Vehicle PickUp: Transportation to pick upyour vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, Roadside

Assistance will provide bus or commercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in the

same town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not providedfor U.S. or Canada residents. Allservices provided in the U.S. andCanada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by Roadside

Assistance.

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for the

following:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsdue to a major force or unforeseen circumstances,such as natural phenomenaof an extraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery of assistance services.




. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived fromthe services provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Chevrolet dealer thatis nearest to the temporarystorage facility for the disabled

vehicle.. Cost of all maneuvers required

to access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costs arenot covered by the Roadside

Assistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance services areof no cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which are listedpreviously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0800

United States

1-866-466-8901

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Chevrolet reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program at any time without notification.

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada)

When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduled

into the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you are

urged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for sameday-repair.




Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)

To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/or hybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and Owner

Assistance Information”

furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helps

to minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering Courtesy

Transportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of your dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported by

original receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should you

arrange transportation througha friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer for information regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by original

receipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,




insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage

fees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttle

service, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact your dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change,

or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair (U.S. and Canada)

If the vehicle is involved in a

collision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safety

are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses in

prior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.

A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history of these parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM New

Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.

As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/

corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle




Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians andstate‐of ‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained

technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded by

various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by using

aftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, we

recommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, call

emergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.

Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13 ‑ 7 or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13 ‑ 9.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number.

. Driver license number.

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).

13 16 C I f i




. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? on page 3 ‑ 29.

Managing the Vehicle Damage

Repair ProcessIn the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision parts

be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby the GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may

initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays within

reasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service information

needed to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

C t I f ti 13 17




Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operational

information about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.

funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernment

If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.

13 18 C t I f ti




To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov .

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernment

If you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited.Call Transport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch

80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General Motors

In addition to notifying NHTSA

(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter P.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Customer Information 13 19




Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deployment

and deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner ’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certain

crash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:

. How various systems in thevehicle were operating.

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded

by the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type of personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read the

information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

13 20 Customer Information




GM will not access this data or share it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others for research purposes, where a need is

shown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar ®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash or near crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditions

provides information on datacollection and use and is availableat www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by

pressing theQ button and

speaking to an advisor. See OnStar Overview on page 14‑ 1 for moreinformation.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)

RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote door

locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or record

personal information or link withany other GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatement

This vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

OnStar 14-1



OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar Overview

OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional Information

OnStar AdditionalIn fo rma tio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 -5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and Diagnostic

Services.

Overview

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR

(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to an Advisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

14-2 OnStar



14-2 OnStar

PushQ to connect to a live

Advisor to:

. Verify account information or update contact information.

. Get driving directions. Requiresthe available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Push]

to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan or respond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get crisis assistance andevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

Emergency

With Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even if you cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to an

Emergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergency

personnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

Security

OnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with these

services. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it isequipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

Navigation

OnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions or

have them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinationscan also be forwarded to thevehicle from Google Maps™ or MapQuest.com. The OnStar mapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com for coverage maps.

Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a live

Advisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

OnStar 14-3



OnStar 14 3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X . System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to your destination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice

commands.

Route Preview

1. Push X . System responds:

“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say“Goodbye.

”Exits voice

commands.

Repeat


“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say“Repeat.

”System respondswith the last direction given, then

responds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Get My Destination


“OnStar ready,

”then a tone.

2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from Google

Maps™ and MapQuest.com totheir Turn-by-Turn Navigation or screen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: PushQ,

then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.

After the call ends, push the “Go”

button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. For information about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.

14-4 OnStar



14 4 OnStar

Connections

OnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also be

controlled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar mobile app. Seewww.onstar.com for coverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling


“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or number to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


“OnStar ready.

”

2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStar Hands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X . System responds: “Call

ended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number without

pausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds: ” About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then

“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® or Android™-based mobile device,an OnStar mobile app can bedownloaded. The vehicle canbe remote started, if equipped,or the doors can be unlocked fromanywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuel

level, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisor anytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.

OnStar 14-5



O Sta 5

Diagnostics

OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,

transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is needed

between e-mails, pushQ, and an

Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformation

Transferring Service

PushQ to request account transfer

eligibility information. The Advisor can assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStar receives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStar may send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updatedaccount information.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts to

speak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStar service offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle

Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. For more information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY

1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ to

speak with an Advisor. OnStar services require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features to

function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

14-6 OnStar



OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar ’sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStar hardware. OnStar service may not

work if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipmentor software is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service maynot work. Other problems beyondOnStar ’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the

vehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 ‑ 20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of ‐hearing, or speech‐impaired

customers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer ‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStar Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricing andsign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “My Account” tab on the home page.

OnStar 14-7



OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some of the OnStar services, like Remote

Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Assistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturer of the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in French or Spanish.

PushQ and ask an Advisor.

Advisors can speak French or Spanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock or

Stolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStar can contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS)

. Obstruction of the GPS canoccur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar could

have difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStar can use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near the

antenna to prevent blocking cellular and GPS signal reception. Cellular reception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStar Message

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reached

maximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try the

call again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

14-8 OnStar



Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to be

available and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment on page 9

‑ 51. Added

electrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStar system and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive

users of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellular communications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.

INDEX i-1



A Accessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Additional Information,

OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Adjustments

Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11

Air Filter, Passenger

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Airbag

Adding Equipment to the

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Airbag System

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

How Does an Airbag

Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Passenger Sensing

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See after an

Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

When Should an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-25

Airbags

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16

Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Servicing Airbag-Equipped

Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Alarm System

Anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-26, 10-24

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Antenna

Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-theft

Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-37

Antilock Brake

System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Appearance Care

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22, 7-28

Audio System

Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45

Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2 Automatic

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-22

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Shift Lock Control

Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

i-2 INDEX



BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Voltage and Charging

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25

Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Brake System Warning

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21

Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-28

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and

Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-50

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

California

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii

Capacities and

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Cargo

Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-54

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17

Check

Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25

Child Restraints

Infants and Young

Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-47

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54, 3-56

Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30

INDEX i-3



Cleaning

Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 8-10

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Compressor Kit, TireS e a l a n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Connections, OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Coolant

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Engine Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Engine Temperature

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13

Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Transportation

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13Cover

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4, 13-5Text Telephone (TTY)

Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6


Service Publications

Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Customer Satisfaction

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14

Danger, Warnings, and

Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19Daytime Running Lamps/

Automatic Headlamp

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34Diagnostics, OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Door

Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3

i-4 INDEX



Drive Systems

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-26, 10-24

Driver Information

Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24, 5-29

Driving

Characteristics and

Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-24

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7

If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Dual Automatic Climate

Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

EElectrical Equipment,

Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Electrical System

Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Fuses and Circuit

Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Instrument Panel Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Emergency, OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Check and Service Engine

Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Coolant Temperature

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Cooling System Messages . . .5-33

Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3

Engine (cont.)Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Overheated Protection

Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Engine Oil

Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19

Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeatures

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4

INDEX i-5



Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-55

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-88

Fluid

Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Front Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Filling a Portable Fuel

Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-39

Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-39

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Requirements, California . . . . .9-39System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Fuel Economy

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

Fuses

Engine Compartment

Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Fuses and Circuit

Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Instrument Panel Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48

Gasoline

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

GaugesEngine Coolant

Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Warning Lights and

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

General Information

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Headlamps

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Daytime Running Lamps/

Automatic Headlamp

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-23

High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated and Ventilated Front

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

i-6 INDEX



Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1

High Voltage Devices and

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7

Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4


Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

I

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission Lock

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Infants and Young Children,

Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Instrument Panel

Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-74

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36Keyless Entry

Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-37

Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5

Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

LATCH System

Replacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54

LATCH, Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Lighting

Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lights

Airbag Readiness. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-22

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

INDEX i-7



Locks

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children (LATCH

System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenance

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Maintenance Schedule

Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Messages

Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-37

Battery Voltage and

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Object Detection System . . . . .5-36Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Monitor System, Tire

Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-43

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22, 7-28

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

NNavigation

Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Navigation, OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

i-8 INDEX



OObject Detection System

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Oil

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-38

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

OnStar ®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

OnStar ® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Ordering

Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16

Outlets

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Overheated Engine

Protection

Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Overview, OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Park

Shifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Parking

Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Brake and P (Park)

Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21

Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-31

Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3

Personalization

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Phone

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46

Power

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19

Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Pregnancy, Using Safety

Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Privacy

Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

Program

Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

INDEX i-9



RRadio Frequency

Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20

Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Radios AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Rear Climate Control

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 8-10

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45Rear Seat Entertainment

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-45

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-34

Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5

Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Recommended

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Records

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Recreational Vehicle

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-79

Reimbursement Program,

GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Replacement Parts

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38

Replacing LATCH System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Replacing Safety Belt

System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-23

Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18

General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Restraints

Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Ride Control Systems

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Roads

Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside Assistance

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9

Roof

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-48

Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3

Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22


Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-23

Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-21

i-10 INDEX



Safety Defects Reporting

Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18

General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-12

Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-57

Seats

Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8

Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11

Securing Child

Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54, 3-56

Security

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Ve h ic le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Security, OnStar ® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Service

Accessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4

Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14

Maintenance, General

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1

Publications Ordering

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-12

Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Shift Lock Control Function

Check, Automatic

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24

Shifting

Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Sidemarker and Stoplamps

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare Tire

Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Specifications and

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

StabiliTrak

Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Storage Areas

Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Cargo Management System . . . 4-4

Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Storing the Tire Sealant

and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-64

INDEX i-11



Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

System

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Taillamps


Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6

Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Tires

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-44

Tires (cont.)Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-43

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Sealant and

Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Sealant and Compressor

Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Terminology and

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-53

When It Is Time for New

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-43

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Towing (cont.)Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-79

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Transmission

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Transportation Program,

Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13

Turn and Lane-Change

Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn Signal,


UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-33

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-52

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-48

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

i-12 INDEX



VVehicle

Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Vehicle Care

Storing the Tire Sealant

and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-64

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42


Service Parts Identification

Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Voltage Devices and

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

W Warning

Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Warning Lights, Gauges,

and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-40

Wheels

Alignment and Tire

Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

When It Is Time for New

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-49

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-45

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Windshield

Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Winter

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25

Wipers

Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Wiring, High Voltage

Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28

2012 Traverse Owner's Manual

Documents

Transcript of 2012 Traverse Owner's Manual